JP6764887B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a game machine using a NAND flash memory, it has been proposed to correct a data error and replace the area where the data error has occurred with a redundant area (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-77819

According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that a problem may occur when the data reading time is prolonged.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents the occurrence of defects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the claim of the present application is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and is a storage capable of storing data related to display control. Means (for example, effect data memory 123), display control means (for example, CPU 131, VDP 135, etc.) capable of reading the stored data of the storage means and controlling the display means, and time elapses when the measurement time elapses. A first control (for example, a watch dog timer 134 or the like) including a signal generating means for generating a signal, the display controlling means initializes a measurement time by the signal generating means before the monitoring time elapses. The monitoring time elapses when a predetermined event in which the first control is not executed occurs during the reading period during which the storage data of the storage means is being read (such as control by step S273 of the effect data transfer process during control). It is possible to execute a second control (for example, control by step S281 of the effect data transfer process during control) that initializes the measurement time by the signal generating means, and further, a background when executing the variable display. In the first background, the first background music (for example, music A) is output from the beginning each time the variable display is executed once, and in the second background, at least the first background and the second background are included. , and outputs the second background music over the variable display of a plurality of times (e.g., song B), wherein in the second background, Ri can be output der a predetermined sound when starting variable display (for example, FIG. 57 (B) ) , When the first variable display is started after the second background is set, the predetermined sound is not output.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a defect can be prevented. In addition, even when the music is output over a plurality of variable displays, the start timing of the variable display can be easily recognized, and the fun of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the storage means may include a normal use area (for example, a data area) and an alternative use area (for example, a redundant area) (see, for example, FIG. 13).
In such a configuration, the occurrence of defects can be prevented.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2), as the predetermined event, a process of storing data stored in a normally used area of the storage means in an alternative use area of the storage means (for example, a memory inspection). Step S455 of the process, etc.) may be executed.
In such a configuration, the occurrence of defects can be prevented.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, a determination means for determining whether or not the reading period is in progress (for example, a CPU 131 that executes step S271 of the controlled effect data transfer process). May be provided.
In such a configuration, the occurrence of defects can be prevented.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above is provided with a voice control means (for example, a voice processing circuit 136) capable of controlling the output of the effect sound, and the storage means relates to display control. The data and the data related to the output control of the effect sound are stored as a series of data (for example, moving image data), and the control by the display control means and the control by the voice control means can be executed in synchronization with each other. It may be (see, for example, FIG. 14).
In such a configuration, the occurrence of defects can be prevented.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above, a period during which control delayed due to the occurrence of the predetermined event can be executed after the variable display is started and before the display result is derived. For example, a period during which the decorative pattern is shaken and displayed) may be provided.
In such a configuration, the occurrence of defects can be prevented.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6), the measurement time by the signal generating means is determined based on the number of times the measurement time is initialized by the second control reaches a predetermined number. The initialization may be restricted (for example, in the case of Yes in step S280 of the effect data transfer process during control).
In such a configuration, the occurrence of defects can be prevented.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the following inventions (8) to (17). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a gaming machine that reproduces music over a plurality of variable displays of identification information, as shown in JP2013-34799, and JP2012-125471. There was a gaming machine that repeatedly outputs the part 1 (normal fluctuating sound), which is a part of the music to be played during the pre-reading notice production in the normal fluctuation. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the control of the music to be played is changed according to the situation, it becomes difficult to recognize the start of the fluctuation, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is lowered. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine with an improved interest in the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of (8) according to another aspect is
(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and at least as a background when executing the variable display, the first A background and a second background are included. In the first background, the first background music (for example, music A) is output from the beginning each time the variable display is executed once, and in the second background, a plurality of times. A second background music (for example, music B) can be output over the variable display, and in the second background, a predetermined sound can be output when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 57 (B)).
According to such a configuration, even in a state where the music is output over a plurality of variable displays, the start timing of the variable display can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game is improved.

(9) In the game machine of (8) above
There may be a plurality of types of modes for outputting the predetermined sound (for example, start sound A and start sound B).
According to such a configuration, even in a state where the music is output over a plurality of variable displays, the start timing of the variable display can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game is improved.

(10) In the game machine of (9) above
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state may be different depending on the type of the predetermined sound.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of predetermined sound, and the interest of the game is improved.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10) above,
In the same gaming state, either the first background or the second background may be displayed (for example, the background image can be switched by detecting the background switching operation).
According to such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest of the game is improved.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11) above,
It is possible to change from one of the first background and the second background to the other during the variable display (for example, the background switching process can be executed within the process of S90172).
According to such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest of the game is improved.

(13) In any of the game machines (8) to (12) above,
In the first background and the second background, a common stop sound may be output when the variable display is finished (for example, FIG. 57).
With such a configuration, the end timing of the variable display becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game is improved.

(14) In any of the game machines (8) to (13) above,
In the second background, when the second background music is not output, the predetermined sound may not be output (for example, FIG. 57B).
According to such a configuration, since the predetermined sound is output only when necessary, the predetermined sound can be preferably output.

(15) In any of the game machines (8) to (14) above,
A determination means (for example, CPU 90103 that executes the process of step S90212) for determining whether or not the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed, and the determination means. As a notice effect executed based on the determination result, a notice effect capable of executing a specific notice effect (for example, a stop symbol notice) that displays a reach loss as a display result of the variable display in a predetermined number of variable displays before the variable display of the notice target. When the execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 that executes the process of S90162) and the display result of the variable display become a specific result by the first identification information (for example, the probability variation symbol) of the identification information, the first advantage as the advantageous state. When the state (for example, the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot) is controlled and the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result by the second identification information (for example, the non-probability variation symbol) of the identification information, the first advantageous state is regarded as the advantageous state. The advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the processes of steps S90114 to S90117) that controls the second advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state of the non-probability change jackpot) that is more disadvantageous, and the control to the first advantageous state. Based on the above, it is controlled to a special state (for example, a probability variation state (high probability high base state)) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state, and is controlled to the second advantageous state during the special state. A special state control means (for example, CPU 90103 that executes the process of step S90117) for controlling to a state more disadvantageous than the special state (for example, low probability high base state, low probability low base state) is further provided, and in the special state When the specific advance notice effect is started, the rate at which the reach loss due to the second identification information is displayed may be high (for example, FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a notice effect that pretends to be controlled to a disadvantageous state to the player, and the interest of the game is improved.

(16) In any of the game machines (8) to (15) above,
A determination means (for example, CPU 90103 that executes the process of step S90212) for determining whether or not the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed, and the determination means. As a notice effect executed based on the judgment result by, a notice that can execute a specific notice effect (for example, a stop symbol notice) that displays a reach loss as a display result of the variable display in a predetermined number of variable displays before the variable display of the notice target. Further provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 that executes the process of S90162), in the variable display of the advance notice target of the specific advance notice effect, reach by the same identification information as the reach loss displayed in the specific advance notice effect. When is executed, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state may be higher than when the reach by other identification information is executed (for example, FIG. 54).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the execution mode of the specific notice effect and the execution mode of the variable display of the notice target, and the interest of the game is improved.

(17) In any of the game machines (8) to (16) above,
An effect state control means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) capable of controlling the effect state in the advantageous state to any one of a plurality of types of effect states (A mode or B mode in FIG. 62, etc.) and the effect state during the advantageous state. Further provided with a notification effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) that executes a notification effect (for example, a notification effect by the first notification image 90204 and the second notification image 90214 shown in FIG. 62) related to the number of game media given. When the notification effect means is controlled to the first effect state (A mode or the like) by the effect state control means, the notification effect means the notification effect according to the first notification mode (first notification image 90204 or the like shown in FIG. 62). When executed and controlled by the effect state control means to a second effect state (B mode or the like) different from the first effect state, a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (shown in FIG. 62). The notification effect may be executed by the second notification image 90214 or the like).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state by the notification effect according to the effect state.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows various circuits mounted on an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory inspection process under control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect data transfer processing during control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory inspection process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the storage area in an effect data memory. It is a figure which shows the structure example of moving image data. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control execution data. It is a sequence diagram which shows the moving image reproduction control example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the moving image reproduction control example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the moving image reproduction control example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the start winning prize notification control example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the start winning prize notification control example. It is a figure which shows the start winning prize notification execution example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the effect control example after reach. It is a sequence diagram which shows the effect control example after reach. It is a figure which shows the production execution example after reach. It is a timing diagram when updating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is a sequence diagram which shows the error notification control example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the error notification control example. It is a figure which shows the error notification execution example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the advance notice effect control example. It is a sequence diagram which shows the advance notice effect control example. It is a figure which shows the notice production execution example and the like. It is a timing diagram when the notice effect is executed. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random value for game which is counted on the side of a main board. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the configuration example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stop symbol notice setting processing. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in stop symbol notice setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol notice pattern. It is a timing chart when the stop symbol notice is executed or not executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the stop symbol determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop symbol notice pattern in a modification. It is explanatory drawing in the modification in the case of having a plurality of effective lines. It is a timing chart which shows the output timing of audio in each background. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation start sound setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the fluctuation start sound setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the voice reproduction processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the background switching process. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification effect. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a round. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a round. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-processing of the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-processing of the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-processing of the 2nd modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the notification effect of the 2nd modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode of the notification effect of the 2nd modification.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and is identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special figure game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged on the screen of the image display device 5, the corresponding decorative symbols are variably displayed. In this case, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. , "Left", "Middle", and "Right", each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts to change the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". The final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to display identification information such as a decorative symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numbers. It may be an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. It may be composed of a symbol such as a character or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed so as to flow from top to bottom in order from the one with the smallest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number, and when the decorative symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the process continues. The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

A start winning memory display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, a hold display is performed in which the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done.

For example, when the first start prize is generated when the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored second special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1. The hold display in the start winning prize memory display area 5H is based on information (hold memory information) related to the variable display that has not yet been started, such as the number of hold memory of the first special figure and the number of hold memory of the second special figure. Display identifiable.

The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as a total hold memory number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of them (for example, It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories.

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning prize memory display 5H area. In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs.

A circular lighting accessory 90 for directing is provided on the upper part of the image display device 5. A light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED is built in the lighting accessory 90 for production. The effect lighting accessory 90 may be configured to be rotatable, for example, and may be configured to light when rotating (operating). Around the image display device 5, such as the upper part and the lower part of the image display device 5, a plurality of production models (production accessory devices) that can be combined by advancing to the front of the display screen of the image display device 5 are formed. Movable members 32A and 32B for directing are provided. These movable members 32A and 32B for effect are used as an effect model for executing a predetermined effect by advancing to the front surface of the display screen in the image display device 5 and coalescing during the variable display of the decorative pattern. ..

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second starting winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball is less likely to enter (pass) than in the open state. In this way, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has a first variable state such as an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening or an expanded open state, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state where it is difficult to pass (enter).

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) It becomes easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is a first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal pattern (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a large number of obstacle nails, and the like. As a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be good. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3. A game effect lamp 9 is provided around the game area. Around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, a frame member arranged on the peripheral edge of the image display device 5, etc.) A decorative LED may be arranged in the. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) is provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 3. The hitting ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like in order to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the elastic force of the game ball can be adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount) of the hitting ball operation handle by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick as a player's operation.

The controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 2 may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. The controller sensor unit 35A may include a tilting direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick as an operation of the player. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 2 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B. The push sensor 35B detects a pressing operation on the push button 31B as an operation of the player. When an operation by the player is detected in the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the display effect of the image display device 5 may be changed or the display effects of the image display device 5 may be changed or the speakers 8L and 8R may be controlled by the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. It may be used in the production such as the sound output from the player, the lighting operation (blinking operation) in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the lighting accessory 90 for the effect.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a lamp driver board 13, and a motor driver board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting control and extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol and the second. Predetermined display symbols such as controlling the variable display of the special symbol and controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting control and extinguishing control of the ordinary symbol display 20 or color development control. It also has a function to control the variable display of.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. , Game effect lamp 9, lighting accessory 90 for production, movable members 32A, 32B for production, and various circuits for controlling the progress of production by electric parts for production are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display mode in the image display device 5, the lighting mode in the game effect lamp 9, the lighting accessory 90 for effect, and other decorative LEDs, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation such as all or a part of the output mode and all or a part of the operation of the movable members 32A and 32B for the effect. ..

The lamp driver board 13 is a board for generating a lamp drive signal provided separately from the effect control board 12, and the game effect lamp 9 and the effect lighting accessory 90 are based on the lamp control signal from the effect control board 12. It suffices to include a driver circuit or the like that generates a drive signal that enables switching between lighting and extinguishing of other decorative LEDs and the like. The motor driver board 14 is a board for generating a motor drive signal provided separately from the effect control board 12, and the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B are rotated and stopped based on the motor control signal from the effect control board 12. , A driver circuit that generates a drive signal that enables switching of the rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), and the like may be included. The movable member drive motor 33A may be connected to the effect movable member 32A via a predetermined link mechanism, and may be able to supply power that enables the operation and position of the effect movable member 32A to be changed. It suffices that the movable member drive motor 33B is connected to the effect movable member 32B via a predetermined link mechanism and can supply power that enables the operation and position of the effect movable member 32B to be changed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. It should be. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, other switches connected to the main board 11 (for example, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the glass door, the game board 2 itself A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the switch, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave) may be provided. The main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first hold display 25A, a second hold display 25B, a general figure hold display 25C, and the like. The wiring that transmits the command signal for display control is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display content in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. Includes lamp control commands used to control the lighting mode of lighting accessories 90 and other decorative LEDs, and motor control commands used to control the operation of movable member drive motors 33A and 33B. It has been.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. The ROM 101 may be configured as a read-only semiconductor memory.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

On the main board 11, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is countably updatable. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be generated by a random number circuit 104 of the game control microcomputer 100, a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, or the like. As described above, the game random number may be partially or wholly updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104, or the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. It may be partially or wholly updated by the software.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored.

FIG. 3 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 includes an input circuit 121, a memory controller 122, an effect data memory 123, a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 132, a watchdog timer 134, a VDP 135, a voice processing circuit 136, a lamp control circuit 137, and a motor control circuit. 138 is installed. The VDP 135 includes an instruction decoder 141, a demultiplexer 142, a video decoder 143, a VRAM 144, and a display drive circuit 145. The voice processing circuit 136 includes a voice decoder 151. A part or all of the configuration shown in FIG. 3 may be included in the effect control microcomputer. For example, a microprocessor for effect control in which a CPU 131, a VDP 135, a voice processing circuit 136, a lamp control circuit 137, and a motor control circuit 138 are integrated may be used.

The input circuit 121 may include a buffer circuit or the like for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 122 executes various processes on the stored data of the effect data memory 123 in response to the request signals supplied from the CPU 131 and the VDP 135. The effect data memory 123 stores in advance various image data (image element data) indicating the display image in the image display device 5. The image data stored in the effect data memory 123 may include still image data and moving image data. As the still image data, sprite image data which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative patterns variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, may be prepared. .. Further, the character displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, the image data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, and the background image may be stored in the effect data memory 123 in advance. In addition to the image data, the effect data memory 123 may store a part or all of the audio data used for the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 123 may store a part or all of the lamp drive data used for lighting drive the game effect lamp 9, the effect lighting accessory 90, and other decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 123 may store a part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B. The effect data memory 123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory such as a NAND flash memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten. However, in the normal use state in which the progress of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled, the effect data memory 123 is used as a read-only storage device. The memory controller 122 may read data having an integral multiple of 512 bytes from the effect data memory 123, for example, when a 512-byte sector is the minimum unit for data transfer, with respect to the effect data memory 123. It suffices if it is writable.

The memory controller 122 reads the sector data corresponding to the request signal from the CPU 131 from the effect data memory 123. The memory controller 122 may be able to perform error detection and error correction on the read sector data. In sector data error detection, the number of error bits and the error bit position are specified. At this time, it is determined whether or not error correction is possible. If error correction is possible, it suffices if the error correction can be executed and the sector data can be transferred to RAM 133, VRAM 144, or the like and stored. The effect data memory 123 may store the management information of the erasure unit block. The erasing unit block is an erasing unit when erasing the stored data of the effect data memory 123. The management information of the erasing unit block may include information indicating the number of erasing processes executed in each erasing unit block. The memory controller 122 reads the management information of the erase unit block including the sector data, and determines whether to refresh (data refresh) the memory cell of the sector data in the effect data memory 123 based on the information of the number of error bits and the like. To do.

In the effect data memory 123, deterioration of the memory cell occurs due to factors such as erasure of the stored data and read disturb. The read disturb occurs when the number of times of reading the stored data of the effect data memory 123 increases, the electrons accumulated in the floating gate of the memory cell are gradually drawn out, and the threshold voltage of the transistor changes. .. In addition, even if readdisturbation does not occur, the electrons accumulated in the floating gate of the memory cell may be gradually emitted at an extremely slow speed, causing data retention that changes the threshold voltage of the transistor. is there. Deterioration of memory cells due to read disturb or data retention can be recovered by refreshing the memory cells. Deterioration of a memory cell due to erasure of stored data reduces the life expectancy of the memory cell and may be unrecoverable even if the memory cell is refreshed. In this case, the block including the unrecoverable memory cell is regarded as a bad block (bad area), and an alternative process of transferring data to a separately provided alternative block (alternative area) is executed.

The CPU 131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The ROM 132 stores a program for effect control, fixed data, and the like. The RAM 133 provides a work area for the CPU 131. The watchdog timer 134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses from the monitoring time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout that becomes a time-lapse signal. Generate a signal. The timeout signal may be any signal that resets the CPU 131 and restarts it. The start method of the watchdog timer 134 may be set by the reset setting stored in the program management area of the ROM 132. The watchdog timer 134 may enable or disable the reset operation due to the passage of the timeout time according to the WDT start data stored in the WDT start register included in the built-in register. The watchdog timer 134 clears the count value, which is the stored value of the counter circuit, by sequentially writing a plurality of WDT clear data to the WDT clear register included in the built-in register, and restarts the counting operation. The CPU 131 can clear the watchdog timer 134 and restart it by periodically setting the WDT clear data in the WDT clear register. On the other hand, when the processing of the CPU 131 is delayed due to some kind of failure and the watchdog timer 134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time elapses, a timeout signal is generated and the CPU 131 is reset.

The CPU 131 executes a process for controlling the progress of the effect by the electric component for the effect according to the effect control program read from the ROM 132. In this process, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU 131 reads fixed data from the ROM 132, a variable data writing process in which the CPU 131 writes various variable data to the RAM 133 and temporarily stores them, and various types in which the CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the RAM 133. The variable data read processing for reading the variable data of the above, the reception processing in which the CPU 131 receives the input of various signals from the outside, the transmission processing in which the CPU 131 outputs various signals to the outside, or a part or all of these processes are included. May be good.

In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 132 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 132 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 131 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. There is. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data. A part or all of the effect control pattern and the effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a group of instructions in which a series of transfer instructions to be executed by the VDP 135 are described according to the order of image processing and the like. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the effect using such a display list, it is sufficient that the electric components for the effect can be controlled in cooperation with each other. The RAM 133 stores programs and various data used for controlling electrical components for production. The CPU 131 may be able to read the program or data stored in the RAM 133 in a read time shorter than the read time of the program or data stored in the ROM 132.

The VDP 135 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU 131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP 135 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP135 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP 135 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The VDP 135 may be configured to include an instruction decoder 141, a demultiplexer 142, a video decoder 143, a VRAM 144, and a display drive circuit 145. The instruction decoder 141 decodes the instruction unit (instruction code) included in the display control command from the CPU 131, and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, the display control instruction group included in the decoding result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP 135. Further, the voice control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 136. The lamp control instruction group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 137. The motor control command group included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 138. The demultiplexer 142 inputs the moving image data read from the effect data memory 123, and outputs the video data and the audio data separately. The video data output from the demultiplexer 142 is input to the video decoder 143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 142 is input to the audio decoder 151 of the audio processing circuit 136. The video decoder 143 decompresses and outputs the compressed and encoded video data. The video data output from the video decoder 143 is stored in a predetermined area of the VRAM 144. The VRAM 144 temporarily stores the image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 135. The VRAM 144 may be provided with, for example, a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. The CG buffer temporarily saves the palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the drawing process by VDP135 is executed, and temporarily saves the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used to do things like that.

A frame buffer is provided inside the VRAM 144 or in a memory module separate from the VRAM 144. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP 135 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer may be, for example, pixel data (raster data) created by VDP135 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. In the frame buffer, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 are stored. The virtual display area to be used may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area read by the VDP 135 is the display drive circuit. By being supplied to 145, it may be output to the image display device 5. An image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. The display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored in the image drawing area. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 135 to the CPU 131, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 135 to the CPU 131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The display drive circuit 145 is a circuit for outputting signals for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5. The display drive circuit 145 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 together with a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data created by the VDP 135. Just do it.

The voice processing circuit 136 generates a voice signal that enables voice output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 131 and VDP 135. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 142 of the VDP 135 is input to the audio decoder 151 of the audio processing circuit 136. The voice decoder 151 decompresses the compressed and encoded voice data so that a voice signal can be generated. Further, the audio processing circuit 136 may include an audio data memory that can store audio data that is not included in the moving image data in advance. The voice processing circuit 136 may generate a voice signal by decompressing the voice data read from the voice data memory based on an instruction or a register setting from the CPU 131 or the VDP 135.

The lamp control circuit 137 controls lighting modes (light emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9, the effect lighting accessory 90, and other decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 137 generates lamp control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 131 and VDP 135, and outputs the lamp control data to the lamp driver board 13. The motor control circuit 138 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) of the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B. The motor control circuit 138 generates motor control data based on instructions and register settings from the CPU 131 and VDP 135, and outputs the motor control data to the motor driver board 14.

On the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the effect are countably updatable. The random numbers used to control the progress of such an effect are also referred to as effect random numbers. The effect random number may be generated by a random number circuit built in or external to the effect control microcomputer, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 133, or the like. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various effect determination random values such as a random value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of a decorative symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect can be counted. Is controlled by.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a ball hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the first starting ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The starting condition is satisfied. After that, for example, the first start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state has ended. When the first start condition is satisfied, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball launched toward the game area passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Will be done. The second start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B. After that, for example, the second start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state has ended. When the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. When the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening.

In the normal variable winning ball device 6B, based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 is "normal symbol hit", the opening control and the expansion opening in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip becomes the tilt position Control is performed, and closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time is performed is performed. The open control and the open / close control allow the game ball to easily pass or pass through the second start winning opening when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the wide open state as the first variable state. The normal figure start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 is established based on the fact that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, for example, the normal symbol display 20 is used based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, such as the end of the previous normal symbol game. The figure game is started. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss".

Special when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Whether or not to make the variable display result of the symbol a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted toward the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively.

In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. As the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" (specific display result) when the predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display result is derived and displayed when the predetermined lost symbol is derived and displayed. It becomes "missing" (non-specific display result). Based on the variable display result being "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state which is advantageous for the player. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, for example, a round game in which the large winning opening is continuously opened for 29.5 seconds or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the large winning opening and the winning ball is generated. (Simply also called "round") is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "16") is reached. Therefore, in the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls very easily, which is an advantageous game state for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

After the big hit game state ends, the game state becomes the probabilistic state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined probability change control condition, and the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit probability) becomes higher than the normal state. Control may take place. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next jackpot game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the game state becomes the time saving state, and the time saving control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous changing mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required for the next variable display result to become a "big hit" is shortened, and a special gaming state ("advantageous gaming state") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Also called). Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the image display device 5, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped and shaken in a state where they continuously match the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaled or deformed, multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. The reach effect may include a normal reach effect and a super reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a jackpot combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

A variable display of a decorative pattern is performed as an effect of a liquid crystal display on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, an effect using a character image and an effect of displaying a broadcast image based on a jackpot determination and a determination result of a fluctuation pattern are also executed. Various effects performed during variable display in which special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner are also referred to as "effects during variable display". As an example of the effect during variable display, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will be in the reach state, the possibility that the reach effect of the super reach will be executed, and the variable display due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol. A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell the sex will do. A plurality of notice effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the notice effect is executed.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" ("normal"). It includes a case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") and a case where the variable display mode is "reach loss". When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", the reach effect is executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach loss combination) that does not become is stopped and displayed (derived).

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number of the balls may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving points, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. Controlling, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is the first probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of first consecutive chans (eg, "10").

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, game control process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and other games in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

In the game control process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the second special symbol display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is a process that enables.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the effect control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process processing. In the game control process processing shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not a start winning prize has occurred (step S11). As an example, in step S11, the input state (on / off) of the start winning signal, which is the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, is checked, and if it is on, the start is started. It may be determined that a prize has been generated.

If a start winning is generated in step S11 (step S11; Yes), a random number at the time of winning is stored (step S12). As an example, in the process of step S12, a random number circuit 104 built in (or externally attached) to the game control microcomputer 100, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control micro A game random number (random number value for determining variable display result, game state determination) updated by at least a part of a random counter configured by using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 102 in the computer 100. Part or all of the numerical data indicating the random number value (random number value, random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern) is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in, for example, a hold random number value storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100.

Following the process of step S12, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S13). As an example, in the process of step S13, a setting for transmitting a start prize designation command for notifying the occurrence of the start prize to the effect control board 12 may be made. When the start winning is not generated in step S11 (step S11; No), or after the process of step S13 is executed, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S21). Then, the process according to the determination value is selected and executed from the plurality of processes described in advance in the computer program for game control.

For example, when the value of the game process flag is "0", it is determined whether or not the variable display of the symbol (variable display game) can be started (step S101). As an example, in the process of step S101, it is determined whether or not the number of holds of the variable display game is "0" by checking the stored contents of the hold random number value storage unit. At this time, if the number of holds is other than "0", the variable display is started because the variable display is held after the variable display start condition is satisfied and the start condition is not yet satisfied. Judge that it is possible. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is "0", it is determined that the variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S101; No), the game control process process is terminated.

When the variable display can be started in step S101 (step S101; Yes), the definite symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result is determined (step S102). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is called the special figure display result. In the process of step S102, the game random number (random number value for determining the variable display result, the random number value for determining the game state, and the fluctuation) stored at the beginning (the storage area having the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit. Read the random number value for pattern determination, etc.). The game random number read from the hold random number value storage unit may be temporarily stored in a variable display random number buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100. Then, using the random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the variable display result determination table is determined so that the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" at a higher rate than in the normal state or the time saving state. It suffices if the judgment value in is set.

When the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S102, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is set to the probabilistic state by using the random value for determining the game state and the game state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special game state. Corresponding to these determination results, a definite symbol to be derived and displayed as a variable display result may be determined.

Following the process in step S102, the internal flags and the like are set (step S103). As an example, in the process of step S103, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S102, the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is turned on. set. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic confirmation flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is set to the on state. , It may be identifiable that it will be in a probabilistic state. After that, the value of the game process flag is updated to "1" (step S104), and then the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is "1", the fluctuation pattern and the like are determined (step S111). FIG. 5 shows a setting example of a fluctuation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each variation pattern shows the required time (variable display time) from the start of the variable display to the derivation display of the definite symbol that is the variable display result, and the outline of the effect mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 is "non-reach" and the case where the variable display mode is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of them and when the variable display result is a "big hit". As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance for each fluctuation time (variable display time) in the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be determined.

In the process of step S111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined ratio by using the variation pattern determination random number value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, by making the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern different depending on whether or not the variable display result is determined as "big hit", there is a possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. (Big hit reliability) can be different.

Further, in the process of step S111, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" by determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be "missing". .. Alternatively, before determining the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" by using the reach determination random value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S111, it suffices that the variation pattern can be determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of the presence / absence of reach.

Following the process of step S111, various control commands corresponding to the start of variable display are transmitted (step S112). As an example, in the process of step S112, as the variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display, the variable display result notification command for notifying the variable display result, the variable display time of the decorative symbol, the type of reach effect, and the like are variablely displayed. Settings may be made to send a variation pattern specification command or the like that notifies the variation pattern indicating the mode. In addition, in response to the decrease in the number of holds due to the start of the variable display, a setting may be made to send a hold number notification command for notifying the number of holds after the decrease.

The variable display time is set in response to the determination of the variation pattern by the process of step S112. In addition, a setting may be made to start variable display of the special symbol by either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the variable display of the symbol may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Which special symbol display device uses the special symbol to execute the special symbol game is based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed. It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. After that, the value of the game process flag is updated to "2" (step S113), and then the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is "2", it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S121). Then, if the variable display time has not elapsed (step S121; No), the variable display control of the special symbol is performed (step S122), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S121; Yes), the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and control is performed to derive and display the confirmed symbol (step S123).

Following the process of step S123, various control commands corresponding to the end of the variable display are transmitted (step S124). As an example, in the process of step S124, a variable display end command for instructing the end (stop) of the variable display and a big hit start specification command (fanfare command) for designating the start of the big hit game state when the variable display result is "big hit". ) Etc. may be set to be transmitted.

After executing the process of step S124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" (step S125). Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" (step S125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to "3" (step S126), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display result is "missing" instead of "big hit" (step S125; No), the game process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0" (step). S127), the game control process process is terminated. When the process of step S127 is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, and when it is determined to end based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, these gaming states are terminated. Settings for controlling to the normal state may be made.

When the value of the game process flag is "3", it is determined whether or not to end the big hit game state depending on whether or not the predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S131). The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all the rounds executed in the jackpot game state have been completed. If the jackpot game state is not terminated (step S131; No), the game motion control at the time of jackpot is performed (step S132), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state is terminated (step S131; Yes), a setting for controlling the gaming state after the jackpot ending is made (step S133).

As an example, in the process of step S133, it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation flag is on, and if it is on, the probability change flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is turned on. Set to. As a result, when it is decided that the variable display result is "big hit" and it is decided that the game state after the end of the big hit game state is the probabilistic state, the game corresponds to this decision result. The state can be controlled to a probabilistic state. Even when controlling to a time saving state, a setting corresponding to this may be made. After that, the game process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S134), and then the game control process process is terminated.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described. The effect control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. On the effect control board 12 from which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 131 executes the effect control main process.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6, the CPU 131 first executes the initialization process (step S51). In the initialization process of step S51, for example, the storage area in the RAM 133 is cleared, various initial values are set, and the CTC (counter / timer circuit) register that generates a timer interrupt for effect control is set. Further, the initialization process in step S51 may be used to set the timeout value or the measurement start in the watchdog timer 134.

Following the initialization process in step S51, the memory inspection setting at the time of turning on the power is performed (step S52). For example, the CPU 131 supplies an inspection request signal to the memory controller 122. The memory controller 122 inspects the stored data of the effect data memory 123 by executing the memory inspection process based on the supply of the inspection request signal. After the setting in step S52, the memory inspection interval setting is performed (step S53). For example, the CPU 131 may set an interval (standby time) until the next memory inspection process is executed based on the inspection result by the memory controller 122. Next, in response to the power-on, the transfer setting of the effect data predetermined as the initial effect data is performed (step S54). For example, the CPU 131 supplies the transfer request signal prepared in response to the power-on to the memory controller 122. Based on the supply of the transfer request signal, the memory controller 122 is stored in the effect data memory 123 and is used for executing the effect by various effect devices. (Including the binary code constituting the program module) is transferred to RAM 133, VRAM 144 of VDP 135, and the like. Further, the CPU 131 may transfer a predetermined initial data among the programs and data stored in the ROM 132 to the RAM 133, the VRAM 144 of the VDP 135, and the like.

After that, the effect random number update process (step S55) is executed in the effect control main process, and the numerical data indicating the random number value to be the effect random number is updated by the software. The effect random numbers are counted as various random number values used for effect control. The production random number updated by the hardware using the random number circuit built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer on the production control board 12 does not have to be updated in the production random number update process. .. Alternatively, the production random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random number value updated by hardware.

After executing the effect random number update process, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt has occurred (step S56). In step S56, for example, when the timer interrupt signal output from the timer circuit included in the CTC is on, it may be determined that the timer interrupt has occurred. Alternatively, for example, it may be determined that a timer interrupt has occurred when the timer interrupt flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 133 is on. When a timer interrupt occurs, for example, the timer circuit included in the CTC is restarted, or the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off to restart the time measurement until the next timer interrupt occurs. You may.

If no timer interrupt has occurred in step S56 (step S56; No), the effect random number update process in step S55 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when a timer interrupt occurs (step S56; Yes), the timer interrupt process for effect control is executed. The timer interrupt processing for effect control includes command analysis process (step S57), effect control process process (step S58), controlled memory inspection process (step S59), error notification process (step S60), and controlled effect data transfer process. (Step S61) is included.

The CPU 131 can execute interrupt processing for command reception in addition to timer interrupt processing for effect control. In the interrupt processing for command reception, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 is acquired. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 133, for example. In the command analysis process of step S57, it is determined whether or not the effect control command has been received, and if it is received, settings and controls corresponding to the received command are performed. In the effect control process process of step S58, in order to control the progress of the effect by the electric components for the effect, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the progress state of the effect are performed. Will be. In the controlling memory inspection process of step S59, in order to inspect the stored data of the effect data memory 123 according to the elapse of the waiting time, which is the memory inspection interval, during the effect control for controlling the progress of the effect. Is set. In the error notification process in step S60, settings for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality are made based on various error detections in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the controlling effect data transfer process in step S61, a setting for transferring the effect data is made during the effect control that controls the progress of the effect.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S58 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the CPU 131 sets the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 133 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) after the start winning effect setting (step S161) is performed. Correspondingly, a process selected from a plurality of processes described in advance in the computer program for effect control is executed. The processing executed according to the value of the effect process flag includes the variable display start waiting process (step S170), the variable display start setting process (step S171), the variable display during effect process (step S172), and the special figure hit waiting process. (Step S173), a jackpot middle effect process (step S174), and an ending effect process (step S175) are included.

The start winning effect setting in step S161 shown in FIG. 7 is a start prize storage in response to the reception of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 at the time of the start opening prize in which the first start prize or the second start prize occurs. It suffices if the setting for updating the hold display in the display area 5H is included. Along with the update of the hold display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the lighting accessory 90 for the effect, and other decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable members 32A and 32B for the effect, some of them, or The occurrence of the start winning may be notified by all combinations. The setting in step S161 may include a setting for notifying the occurrence of a start winning prize.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process displays a variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the main image display device 5MA based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure is started by the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. When it is determined that either the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received in the variable display start waiting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols and other various effect operations, it includes processing for determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to a variation pattern of a special symbol and a type of display result. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the CPU 131 reads various control data from the effect control pattern and decorates it in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 133. It includes processing for performing various effect controls during variable display of the symbol. Further, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11. (Derived display) processing is included. In addition, in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the final decoration symbol may be displayed as a complete stop display (derivative display). By performing display control based on the end code read from the effect control pattern, the effect control board 12 autonomously derives and displays the fixed decorative symbol without using the effect control command from the main board 11. The variable display result can be confirmed. In the effect processing during variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" after the control for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the decorative symbol is performed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special figure hit waiting process, the jackpot game state is determined based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command and the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start. When it is determined that the jackpot game state is started corresponding to the "big hit" in the variable display result by receiving the jackpot start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game state is not started in response to the "loss" in the variable display result because the waiting time has elapsed without receiving the jackpot start designation command, the effect process flag is cleared. Then, the value is initialized to "0".

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the big hit middle effect processing, the CPU 131 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit medium effect executed in the big hit game state, and executes the effect control based on the set content. The effect control in the jackpot effect process includes control for displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, control for outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamp 9, and decoration. A part or all of the control for changing the lighting mode of the LED and the other effect control may be included. In the jackpot middle effect processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" in response to receiving, for example, the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the ending effect processing, the CPU 131 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the ending effect (big hit end effect) executed when the big hit game state ends, and executes the effect control based on the set content. To do. By controlling the effect in the ending effect process, it is possible to control the display of the effect image, the output of sound, the lighting, extinguishing or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations, and to execute the ending effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. do it. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8, the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is determined (step S201). The final stop symbol is determined based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". .. The definite decorative symbol of the non-reach combination and the definite decorative symbol of the reach loss combination are included in the definite decorative symbol of the loss combination corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the final stop symbol is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right". Will be done. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the final stop symbol is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right". Will be done. When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the final stop symbol is in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is determined that they have the same (matching) decorative pattern. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. Further, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it may be decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S201, the advance notice effect is determined (step S202). In step S202, it suffices if the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the advance notice pattern can be determined. The presence or absence of the advance notice effect corresponds to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed. The notice pattern is determined when the notice effect is executed, and it is sufficient that a plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes. The CPU 131 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the advance notice effect, which is updated by the random number circuit, the random number counter for the effect, and the like, and refers to the advance notice determination table stored in the ROM 132 in advance to give a notice. The presence or absence of production and the notice pattern may be determined.

After the determination in step S202, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). For example, the CPU 131 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns. Further, the CPU 131 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (notice effect control pattern) corresponding to the advance notice pattern determined in step S202 and set it as a use pattern. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those that determine a separate effect control pattern, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is determined. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 133 corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, for example, the image display device 5 is transmitted to the VDP 135 a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of.

After setting the start of the variable display in step S205, the update setting of the hold display at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). In step S206, in the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the hold display corresponding to the variable display at which execution is started is deleted, and the other hold display is moved (shifted). The hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started may be moved (shifted) to the active display area so that the active display is updated. Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 7 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 9, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S221). At this time, if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S221; No), the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (step S222). In step S222, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer is subtracted by 1. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the control data reading condition is satisfied (step S223). In step S223, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the effect control process timer matches any of the effect control process timer determination values set in the effect control pattern. When the timer value of the effect control process timer and the determination value match, it is determined that the control data read condition is satisfied. On the other hand, if the timer value of the effect control process timer and the determination value do not match, it is determined that the control data reading condition is not satisfied (step S223; No), and the variable display during effect process ends.

If the control data read condition is satisfied in step S223 (step S223; Yes), the corresponding control data is read (step S224). In step S224, in the effect control pattern, the effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data) associated with the effect control process timer determination value that matches the timer value of the effect control process timer. , Operation detection control data, etc.) may be read. After that, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S224 includes voice control data (step S225). When it is determined that the voice control data is included (step S225; Yes), the setting for controlling the voice output (voice control) by the speakers 8L and 8R is performed (step S226). In step S226, the instruction or register value shown in the voice control data may be supplied to the VDP 135 or the voice processing circuit 136.

Whether or not the control data read in step S224 includes the lamp control data when it is determined in step S225 that the voice control data is not included (step S225; No) or after the setting in step S226 is performed. Determine (step S227). When it is determined that the lamp control data is included (step S227; Yes), a setting for controlling (lamp control) the lighting mode (light emitting mode) of the various light emitting members is performed (step S228). In step S228, the instruction or register value shown in the lamp control data may be supplied to the VDP 135 or the lamp control circuit 137. Whether or not the control data read in step S224 includes the motor control data when it is determined in step S227 that the lamp control data is not included (step S227; No) or after the setting in step S228 is performed. Is determined (step S229). When it is determined that the motor control data is included (step S229; Yes), a setting for controlling the operating states (motor control) of the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B is performed (step S230). In step S230, the instruction or register value shown in the motor control data may be supplied to the VDP 135 or the motor control circuit 138.

Whether or not the control data read in step S224 includes the display control data when it is determined in step S229 that the motor control data is not included (step S229; No) or after the setting in step S230 is performed. Is determined (step S231). If it is determined that the display control data is not included (step S231; No), the variable display in-process effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display control data is included (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the memory is being inspected (step S232). In step S232, for example, when the memory inspection flag provided in the predetermined area (effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 133 is on, it may be determined that the memory inspection is in progress. The memory inspection flag may be set and turned on when the memory inspection is started in the controlled memory inspection process in step S59 shown in FIGS. 6 and 10, and may be cleared and turned off when the memory inspection is completed. ..

If it is determined in step S232 that the memory inspection is not in progress (step S232; No), it is determined whether or not the effect data is being read (step S233). In step S233, for example, when the effect data reading flag provided in the predetermined area (effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 133 is on, it may be determined that the effect data is being read. The effect data reading flag is set and turned on when the effect data reading process is set in the control effect data transfer process in step S61 shown in FIGS. 6 and 11, and is cleared when the read end control is performed. It should be turned off.

If it is determined in step S233 that the effect data is not being read (step S233; No), a setting for normal control (normal display control) of the display mode in the image display device 5 is made (step S234). Ends the effect processing during variable display. In step S234, the instruction or register value shown in the display control data may be supplied to the VDP 135. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S232 that the memory is being inspected (step S232; Yes), or when it is determined in step S233 that the effect data is being read (step S233; Yes), the image display device. The setting for simple control (simple display control) of the display mode in 5 is made (step S235), and the variable display in-process effect processing is terminated.

In step S235, for example, a setting for performing a simple display may be made using only the image data stored in the VRAM 144. When the memory is being inspected or the effect data is being read, the stored data in the effect data memory 123 cannot be read out in real time and used for image display. Therefore, for example, the image data transferred to the VRAM 144 and stored as the initial data, such as the image data (sprite image data) corresponding to a plurality of types of decorative symbols, is used to perform variable display of the decorative symbols. May be good. On the other hand, for an image display in which it is necessary to read the stored data of the effect data memory 123, such as a reach effect in which a moving image is reproduced using moving image data, the display may be stopped without displaying. .. If it is determined in step S232 that the memory is being inspected, or if it is determined in step S233 that the effect data is being read, the variable display effect process is performed without making the settings in step S235. You may end it. In these cases, since the stored data of the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 144 or the like is not updated, the image display may not be updated and the display may be stopped on the screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, by erasing (clearing) the stored data in the frame buffer, there is a possibility that the display is stopped (blacked out) without displaying the image on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 9, it is determined in step S232 whether or not the memory is being inspected, and whether or not the effect data is being read in step S233. Instead of these determinations, for example, it may be determined whether the read standby signal output from the memory controller 122 is on or off. The read standby signal output from the memory controller 122 is turned on when the stored data in the effect data memory 123 is being read and when the memory check in the effect data memory 123 is being executed, and is turned off in other periods. Any signal can be used.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S221 (step S221; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S236). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S236; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the device waits. If a predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error occurrence is notified in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S236 (step S236; Yes), for example, by supplying a command or a register value to the VDP 135, the final stop symbol (confirmed decoration symbol) that becomes a display result in the variable display of the decoration symbol ) Is derived and displayed (step S237). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S238). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (step S239), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S59 of FIG. 6 as the controlled memory inspection process. In the controlled memory inspection process shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the memory is being inspected (step S251). In step S251, it may be determined whether or not the memory is being inspected, for example, depending on whether or not the memory inspecting flag is on or off. If it is determined in step S251 that the memory inspection is not in progress (step S251; No), it is determined whether or not the waiting time, which is the memory inspection interval, has elapsed (step S252). The CPU 131 may determine that the memory inspection interval has elapsed, for example, when the timeout signal output from the timer circuit included in the CTC is on. Alternatively, the CPU 131 may determine that the memory inspection interval has elapsed when the current time specified using, for example, the RTC (real-time clock) has elapsed the time set as the memory inspection interval.

If the memory check interval has elapsed in step S252 (step S252; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo is being displayed (step S253). In step S253, it is determined that the demo display is in progress when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not progressing and the demo display for displaying the effect image to be a demonstration is executed on the screen of the image display device 5. do it. If the memory inspection interval has elapsed in step S252, the memory inspection interval may be set again. If it is determined in step S253 that the demo is not being displayed (step S253; No), a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the control standby inspection standby time (step S254), and the control is in progress. End the memory check process. The predetermined time set as the controlled inspection standby time in step S254 normalizes the stored data of the effect data memory 123 in response to the case where data refresh or data transfer is executed after the memory inspection interval has elapsed. It may be set within the range where data refresh and data transfer can be normally executed so that the data can be recovered or transferred (substitutable). For example, the predetermined time, which is the control waiting time, may be set to a different time depending on the number of times the effect data memory 123 has been read before the memory inspection interval elapses. In this case, when the number of times of reading of the effect data memory 123 executed before the memory inspection interval elapses is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times determination value, the time is shorter than when it is less than the number of times determination value. May be set. Alternatively, the predetermined time, which is the control waiting time, may be set to a different time depending on the number of error bits generated before the memory inspection interval elapses. In this case, if the number of error bits detected before the memory check interval elapses is greater than or equal to the predetermined error determination value, a shorter time is set than when it is less than the error determination value. May be good.

If the memory inspection interval has not elapsed in step S252 (step S252; No), it is determined whether or not the in-control inspection waiting time set in step S254 has elapsed (step S255). If the control waiting time for inspection has not elapsed (step S255; No), it is determined whether or not the demo is being displayed (step S256). If it is determined in step S256 that the demo is not being displayed (step S256; No), the controlled memory inspection process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S253 that the demo is being displayed (step S253; Yes), when the in-control inspection waiting time has elapsed in step S255 (step S255; Yes), or when the demo is being displayed in step S256. When it is determined that (step S256; Yes), the memory controller 122 is controlled to start the controlled memory inspection for inspecting the stored data of the effect data memory 123 during the effect control (step S257). ). For example, the CPU 131 supplies an inspection request signal to the memory controller 122. The memory controller 122 inspects the stored data of the effect data memory 123 by executing the memory inspection process based on the supply of the inspection request signal. At this time, the corresponding setting is made during the memory inspection (step S258), for example, the memory inspection flag is set and turned on, and the controlled memory inspection process is terminated. If the memory inspection interval has elapsed in step S252, the process proceeds to step S257 without determining whether or not the demo is being displayed in step S253, and the controlled memory inspection is immediately started. You may do so.

If it is determined in step S251 that the memory inspection is in progress (step S251; Yes), it is determined whether or not the memory inspection is completed (step S259). In step S259, when the memory controller 122 receives the memory inspection completion notification, it may be determined that the memory inspection is completed. If it is determined that the memory inspection is not completed (step S259; No), the controlled memory inspection process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the memory inspection is completed (step S259; Yes), control corresponding to the end of the controlled memory inspection is performed (step S260). For example, the CPU 131 may supply an instruction or a register value to the memory controller 122, the VDP 135, or the like in order to read the effect data that has become unreadable due to the execution of the memory inspection. At this time, the corresponding setting is made after the memory inspection (step S261), for example, the memory inspection flag is cleared and turned off, and the controlled memory inspection process is terminated.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S61 of FIG. 6 as the controlled effect data transfer process. In the controlled effect data transfer process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 131 determines whether or not the effect data is being read (step S271). In step S271, it may be determined whether or not the effect data is being read, for example, depending on whether the effect data reading flag is on or off. If it is determined in step S271 that the effect data is not being read (step S271; No), it is determined whether or not the effect data reading condition is satisfied (step S272). In step S272, for example, when it is necessary to transfer the stored data of the effect data memory 123 to the RAM 133 or the VRAM 144 from the contents of the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, if it is determined that the effect data read condition is satisfied. Good. Alternatively, when the stored data of the effect data memory 123 is read based on the signal transmitted from the memory controller 122 or the VDP 135, it may be determined that the effect data read condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in step S272 that the effect data reading condition is not satisfied (step S272; No), the normal WDT clear setting is performed (step S273). In step S273, the watchdog timer 134 is cleared and the measurement time is initialized before the monitoring time of the watchdog timer 134 elapses in response to the case where the stored data of the effect data memory 123 is not read. You can restart it. For example, the CPU 131 may periodically clear the watchdog timer 134 by writing a plurality of WDT clear data in order to the WDT clear register.

When the effect data read condition is satisfied in step S272 (step S272; Yes), the memory controller 122 is controlled to start reading the effect data (step S274). For example, the CPU 131 supplies a read request signal to the memory controller 122. The CPU 131 is not limited to supplying the read request signal to the memory controller 122, and for example, the VDP 135 may supply the read request signal to the memory controller 122. The memory controller 122 may read the stored data of the effect data memory 123 based on the supply of the read request signal, transfer the stored data to the RAM 133 or the VRAM 144, and store the stored data. At this time, for example, the effect data reading flag is set and turned on, and the corresponding setting is made during the effect data reading (step S275), and the controlled effect data transfer process is terminated. Further, in step S275, a predetermined fixed time is set as the clearing time during reading.

If it is determined in step S271 that the effect data is being read (step S271; Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect data has been read (step S276). In step S276, when the completion notification of data reading is received from the memory controller 122, it may be determined that the reading of the effect data is completed. When it is determined that the reading of the effect data is completed (step S276; Yes), control corresponding to the end of reading the effect data is performed (step S277). For example, the CPU 131 may supply an instruction or a register value to the VDP 135 or the like in order to restart the progress of the effect that has been stopped by executing the effect data read. At this time, for example, the effect data reading flag is cleared and turned off, and the corresponding setting is made after the effect data is read (step S278), and the controlled effect data transfer process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S276 that the reading of the effect data is not completed (step S276; No), it is determined whether or not the clearing time during reading has elapsed (step S279). At this time, if the reading clearing time has elapsed (step S279; Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reading clears has reached a predetermined clear upper limit determination value (step S280). The number of times of clearing during reading indicates the number of times that the watchdog timer 134 is cleared by the setting of step S281 after the effect data is started to be read by the control in step S274. For example, in step S275, “0” is set as the initial count value of the clear counter during reading, and the count value may be updated to be incremented by 1 according to the setting in step S282.

If the clearing time during reading in step S279 has not elapsed (step S279; No), or if the clear upper limit determination value has been reached in step S280 (step S280; Yes), the control production data transfer process To finish. On the other hand, if the clear upper limit determination value has not been reached in step S280 (step S280; No), the WDT clear setting during reading is performed (step S281). In step S281, the watchdog timer 134 is cleared and the measurement time is initialized before the monitoring time of the watchdog timer 134 elapses, corresponding to the case where the stored data of the effect data memory 123 is read. It should be restarted by changing to. When the reading WDT clear setting is made in step S281, the reading clear count is updated by 1 or the like (step S282), and the controlling effect data transfer process is terminated.

In the reading WDT clear setting in step S281, the watchdog timer 134 may be set to be cleared at a cycle different from that in the case of the normal WDT clear setting in step S273. For example, in the reading WDT clear setting in step S281, the watchdog timer 134 is cleared in a longer cycle than in the case of the normal WDT clear setting in step S273. In this case, the normal WDT clear setting in step S273 clears the watchdog timer 134 by each setting, whereas the reading WDT clear setting in step S281 is set a plurality of times to clear the watchdog timer 134. You may clear 134. If the watchdog timer 134 is cleared by sequentially setting a plurality of WDT clear data in the WDT clear register, all the plurality of WDT clear data are set when the normal WDT clear setting in step S273 is performed once. In contrast to setting in order, when the reading WDT clear setting is performed once in step S281, only 1 WDT clear data is set, and the reading WDT clear setting is repeated a plurality of times, so that a plurality of WDTs are set. The clear data may be set in order. On the contrary, in the reading WDT clear setting in step S281, the watchdog timer 134 may be cleared in a shorter cycle than in the case of the normal WDT clear setting in step S273.

As described above, in the control-controlled effect data transfer process, when the normal WDT clear setting in step S273 is performed, the measurement time by the watchdog timer 134 is initialized before the monitoring time of the watchdog timer 134 elapses. To do. Further, after starting the reading of the effect data by the control in step S274, if it is determined in step S276 that the reading of the effect data is not completed, the watch is set to clear the WDT during reading in step S281. The measurement time by the watchdog timer 134 is initialized before the monitoring time of the dog timer 134 elapses. As a result, when the reading time of the effect data is prolonged, the watchdog timer 134 can be appropriately cleared to suppress an inappropriate reset of the CPU 131, so that the occurrence of a problem can be prevented.

In the controlled effect data transfer process shown in FIG. 11, it is determined in step S271 whether or not the effect data is being read, and thus whether or not the storage data in the effect data memory 123 is being read. To judge. When data refresh or data transfer (alternative processing) in the effect data memory 123 is executed during this read period, the read period is extended and the normal WDT clear setting in step S273 can be performed. It may disappear. Therefore, if it is determined in step S271 that the effect data is being read, and if it is determined in step S276 that the effect data has not been read, the watchdog timer 134 is set by the reading WDT clear setting in step S281. The measurement time by the watchdog timer 134 can be initialized before the monitoring time elapses. In this case, when it is determined in step S280 that the number of times of clearing during reading has not reached the clear upper limit determination value, the reading WDT clear setting in step S281 can be performed. When it is determined in step S280 that the number of clears during reading has reached the clear upper limit determination value, the WDT clear setting during reading in step S281 is not set, so that the initialization of the measurement time by the watchdog timer 134 is restricted. To. In this way, after the number of clears during reading reaches the clear upper limit determination value, when the monitoring time of the watchdog timer 134 elapses, a timeout signal that becomes a time elapse signal is generated to reset the CPU 131. restart. When the number of clears during reading reaches the clear upper limit determination value, the CPU 131 may be immediately reset and restarted without waiting until the monitoring time of the watchdog timer 134 elapses. For example, when it is determined in step S280 that the number of clears during reading has reached the clear upper limit determination value, a reset interrupt of the CPU 131 may be generated to put the CPU 131 in the reset state.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the memory inspection process executed by the memory controller 122. The memory controller 122 may start executing the memory inspection process based on the supply of the inspection request signal from the CPU 131. As described above, the memory controller 122 only needs to be able to execute the memory inspection process on condition that the signal is supplied from the CPU 131. Alternatively, the memory controller 122 may be able to execute the memory inspection process based on the setting at the time of turning on the power, the end of the memory inspection interval, or the like, without the condition that the signal is supplied from the CPU 131. ..

In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 12, the memory controller 122 reads out the status information stored in the effect data memory 123 or the like (step S451). The status information may include management information of the erasure unit block, management information of the number of error bits, management information of error correction, management information of data refresh, and the like. The management information of the number of error bits may be information that is created each time the sector data is read from the effect data memory 123 and indicates the number of error bits identified by the error detection of each sector data. The error correction management information may be information that is created when the sector data read from the effect data memory 123 is error-corrected and indicates whether or not the error correction of each sector data has been performed. The data refresh management information may be information that is created when the sector data stored in the effect data memory 123 is refreshed and indicates the number of times the data refresh is performed, the execution date and time, and the like.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the data refresh condition is satisfied based on the content of the status information read in step S451 (step S452). For example, when there is sector data in which the number of error bits shown in the management information of the number of error bits exceeds a predetermined error threshold value, it may be determined that the data refresh condition is satisfied. Further, it may be determined that the data refresh condition is satisfied when there is sector data for which the error correction indicated in the error correction management information cannot be performed.

When the data refresh condition is satisfied in step S452 (step S452; Yes), control for executing the data refresh is performed (step S453). In step S453, for example, the stored data of the erasing unit block including the sector data to be refreshed is read, error correction is performed, and the correct data is restored. Then, for the erase unit block from which the stored data has been read, the stored data may be erased and then the restored correct data may be written. Alternatively, the restored correct data may be written in an erasure unit block different from the erasure unit block from which the stored data is read. When the restored correct data is written, it may be determined whether or not the data refresh is normally completed by reading the written data again and comparing it with the data before writing.

When the data refresh condition is not satisfied in step S452 (step S452; No), or after the control in step S453 is performed, it is determined whether or not the data transfer condition is satisfied (step S454). For example, it may be determined that the data transfer condition is satisfied when there is sector data for which the error correction indicated in the error correction management information cannot be performed. Further, it may be determined that the data transfer condition is satisfied when there is sector data in which the number of times the data refresh is performed shown in the data refresh management information exceeds a predetermined transfer threshold value. .. When the data refresh is not normally completed in step S453, it may be determined that the data transfer condition is satisfied.

If the data transfer condition is not satisfied in step S454 (step S454; No), the memory inspection process ends. On the other hand, when the data transfer condition is satisfied (step S454; Yes), the control for executing the data transfer is performed (step S455), and then the memory inspection process is terminated. In step S455, for example, the stored data of the erasing unit block including the sector data to be transferred is read, error correction is performed, and the correct data is restored. At this time, the erasing unit block from which the stored data is read is set as a defective block as a defective area. Then, the restored data may be written to an alternative block that is an alternative area in the redundant area. In addition, the arrangement information included in the address translation table is updated so that the stored data of the alternative block can be read instead of the defective block.

In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 12, when the data refresh condition is satisfied in step S452, the data refresh can be executed by the control in step S453. As a result, even if a memory cell deteriorated due to factors such as read disturb or data retention occurs in the effect data memory 123, the stored data can be restored to the correct data and protected. Further, when the data transfer condition is satisfied in step S454, the alternative process of performing data transfer can be executed by the control in step S455. As a result, in the effect data memory 123, when there is a defective block that becomes an unrecoverable defective area even if the memory cell is refreshed, the stored data of the defective area can be transferred to an alternative block that becomes an alternative area to be protected. it can.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6, the memory inspection setting at power-on is performed in step S52, and the inspection request signal is supplied from the CPU 131 to the memory controller. Based on the supply of this inspection request signal, the memory controller 122 executes the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 12 when the power is turned on. At this time, the data refresh may be executed by the control in step S453, or the data transfer may be executed by the control in step S455. For example, after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, such as before the power is cut off last time, the status information of the effect data memory 123 is updated, and the data refresh condition can be satisfied or the data transfer condition can be satisfied. May be in a state. However, when the power supply is terminated by turning off the power without performing data refresh or data transfer, the deterioration of the memory cell becomes a state of being left unattended and further progressing, and the stored data of the effect data memory 123 has many errors. May contain. Therefore, when the power supply is started again by turning on the power, the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 12 is executed, and if the data refresh condition is satisfied in step S452, the data refresh is executed by the control in step S453. Then, if the data transfer condition is satisfied in step S454, the data transfer is executed by the control in step S455. Further, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6, the memory inspection interval is set in step S53.

In the controlled memory inspection process shown in FIG. 10, when the memory inspection interval has elapsed in step S252, it is determined in step S253 or step S256 that the demo is being displayed, or in step S255. On condition that it is determined that the control waiting time has elapsed, the memory inspection under control can be executed by the control in step S257. In this way, data refresh and data transfer can be executed based on the elapse of the memory inspection interval not only when the power is turned on but also when the progress of the production is being controlled. Even if a long time elapses without stopping the supply, it is possible to execute a process for protecting the stored data of the effect data memory 123. In particular, since an alternative process of data transfer can be executed based on the elapse of the memory inspection interval, the stored data of the defective block, which is a defective area where an unrecoverable data error occurs even if the memory cell is refreshed, can be stored. It can be appropriately moved and stored in an alternative block that serves as an alternative area.

FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of a storage area in the effect data memory 123. The storage area of the effect data memory 123 has three areas, that is, a data area, a control area, and a redundant area. A management table and various production data can be stored in the data area and the redundant area. The effect data may be audio data, lamp drive data, motor drive data, or the like, in addition to image data including still image data and moving image data. The data area is a normally used area used for normal access of the effect data memory 123. The program for controlling the progress of the effect and the effect data used for executing the effect are written and stored in the data area as long as the access is not hindered. The redundant area is an alternative use area that can be used in place of a defective area that interferes with writing or reading in the data area. A defective area such as a defective block determined to interfere with access in the data area is set to prohibit use, and the stored data of the defective area is stored in an alternative area such as an alternative block in the redundant area. The control area is a control information area that stores correspondence information and the like indicating the relationship between the defective area of the data area and the alternative area of the redundant area. As the correspondence information, for example, the arrangement information indicating the correspondence between the address of the data area and the address of the redundant area is stored. The address of the data area and the address of the redundant area may be specified by a page number or a block number, or may be specified by a start address and an end address. Arrangement information indicating the correspondence between the address of the data area and the address of the redundant area may be collectively stored in the address translation table. The address change table is table data of arrangement information that enables the logical block address specified when requesting access to the effect data memory 123 from the CPU 131 or VDP 135 to be converted into the physical block address allocated to the actual storage area. It may be composed of.

In the data area shown in FIG. 13, three defective areas A, B, and D exist. In this case, the redundant area is provided with alternative areas A, B, and D to which the stored data of the defective areas A, B, and D are transferred. Arrangement information A, B, and D that specify the correspondence between the defective areas A, B, and D and the alternative areas A, B, and D are stored in the control area. History information may be written in the redundant area. The history information may be any information indicating the history of data transfer in the effect data memory 123, and may include, for example, date information of data transfer. History information C is stored in the redundant area shown in FIG. Arrangement information C corresponding to history information C is stored in the control area. The arrangement information C is different from the arrangement information indicating the correspondence relationship between the defective area and the alternative area, and has a history flag indicating that the arrangement information is related to the history information and the address information of the redundant area storing the history information. It may be included. By reading the address information included in the arrangement information in which the history flag is turned on, the history information stored in the redundant area can be read. The number of times the data is transferred in the effect data memory 123 may be specified from the date information of the data transfer included in the history information, and it may be determined whether the effect data memory 123 can be continued to be used or should be discarded. In the control area, in addition to the placement information, various management information constituting the status information such as management information of the erasing unit block, management information of the number of error bits, error correction management information, and data refresh management information are stored. It may be remembered.

FIG. 14A shows a configuration example of moving image data included in the image data among the effect data stored in the effect data memory 123. FIG. 14B shows an operation example in which moving image data is separated into video data and audio data and decoded. FIG. 14C shows an execution example of moving image reproduction using moving image data. The moving image data may be configured by multiplexing video data and audio data, each of which is compressed and encoded, in a predetermined container format. In the moving image data, if the video data block in which the packetized video data is stored and the audio data block in which the packetized audio data are stored are arranged in a predetermined order following the header information. Good. The moving image data read from the effect data memory 123 is input to the demultiplexer 142 of the VDP 135 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 142 is supplied to the video decoder 143 of the VDP 135. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 142 is supplied to the audio decoder 151 of the audio processing circuit 136. The video decoder 143 decodes the video data supplied from the demultiplexer 142 and outputs the header information or the timing according to the time stamp added to each packet. The audio decoder 151 decodes the audio data supplied from the demultiplexer 142 and outputs the header information or the timing according to the time stamp added to each packet.

In this way, using the moving image data configured by multiplexing the video data and the audio data, the video data and the audio data are separated and decoded, and then output according to the time stamp. This makes it possible to reproduce a moving image in which the video output and the audio output are synchronized. In the effect data memory 123, video data related to the display control of the image display device 5 and audio data related to output control of the effect sound in the speakers 8L and 8R are stored as a series of moving image data. The VDP 135 and the audio processing circuit 136 reproduce the moving image using the moving image data read from the effect data memory 123, thereby controlling the display of the image display device 5 and controlling the output of the effect sound in the speakers 8L and 8R. And can be executed synchronously.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132. The effect control execution data may be stored in association with the effect control process timer determination value in the effect control pattern. Further, the effect control execution data may be readable and stored on condition that a specific event occurs, such as the occurrence of a start winning prize or the detection of the movement of the player who presses the push button 31B. The effect control execution data may be configured to include a part or all of various control data such as display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, and operation detection control data.

The display control data is configured as data that specifies the display state of the image display device 5, and may include instructions (commands) and register values (parameters) for display control. The content specified by the display control data may include a case where moving image playback is specified and a case where still image display is specified. When the moving image reproduction is specified by the display control data, the control for reproducing and displaying the moving image is executed using the moving image data read from the effect data memory 123. When the still image display is specified by the display control data, the still image is displayed on the screen by using the still image data stored in advance in the VRAM 144 or by using the still image data read from the effect data memory 123. Control is performed. The screen display of the still image may be an animation display in which various effect images are smoothly changed and displayed by switching the display of each frame in a short time. The voice control data is configured as data that specifies the voice output state of the speakers 8L and 8R, and may be configured to include a voice control command and a register value (parameter). The lamp control data is configured as data for designating a lighting mode (light emitting mode) of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9, a lighting accessory 90 for effect, and other decorative LEDs, and is a command (command) or a register value for lamp control. It suffices if it is configured including (parameter). The motor control data may be configured as data for designating the operating states of the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B, and may be configured including commands (commands) and register values (parameters) for motor control. The operation detection control data is configured as data that specifies the motion detection state of the player who operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and is configured to include commands (commands) and register values (parameters) for detection control. Just do it.

The effect control execution data shown in FIG. 15 includes voice control data and lamp control data as well as display control data. On the other hand, the effect control execution data including the voice control data and the lamp control data may be configured separately from the effect control execution data including the display control data. As the effect control pattern, a voice lamp control pattern in which a plurality of combinations in which the effect control process timer determination value and the effect control execution data including the voice control data and the lamp control data are associated with each other may be stored may be prepared. Further, as the effect control pattern, a display control pattern may be prepared in which a plurality of combinations in which the effect control process timer determination value and the effect control execution data including only the display control data are associated with each other are stored.

The CPU 131 determines the effect control pattern in step S203 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8, and determines the control contents of various effects during the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern. Set. For example, in the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 9, when the timer value of the effect control process timer matches any of the effect control process timer determination values set in the effect control pattern, the control data is read in step S223. It is determined that the condition is satisfied. At this time, according to the control data read in step S224, the control content of the audio output is set in step S226, the control content of the lamp output is set in step S228, and the control content of the motor output is set in step S230. , In step S234, the control content of the display output is set. For example, according to the setting in step S234, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a mode specified by the display control data, and an effect image using a still image such as a character image or a background image, or an effect using a moving image in the reach effect. Control is performed to display an image or the like on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, according to the setting in step S226, control is performed to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in the voice output state designated by the voice control data. For example, according to the setting in step S228, control is performed to turn on or off the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9, the effect lighting accessory 90, and other decorative LEDs in the lighting mode (light emitting mode) specified by the lamp control data. According to the setting in step S230, the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B are driven in the operating state specified by the motor control data, and control is performed to move or stop the effect movable members 32A and 32B. Further, in the operation detection state specified by the operation detection control data, the operation of the player who operates the trigger button, the operation stick, the push button 31B, or the like of the stick controller 31A may be detected.

Instructions (commands) and register values (parameters) included in the display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, motor control data, and operation detection control data in the effect control execution data are supplied from the CPU 131 to the VDP 135 and the like. In the VDP 135, for example, the instruction decoder 141 decodes the instruction and instructs image processing according to the decoding result. For example, when a moving image reproduction command is supplied, the moving image data specified from a register value as a parameter or the like is read from the effect data memory 123 and supplied to the demultiplexer 142. Alternatively, when a still image display command is supplied, if the image data specified from the register value as a parameter or the like is stored in the VRAM 144 in advance, drawing is performed so as to arrange the image data at a predetermined position in the frame buffer. Create display data for the screen. Alternatively, when a voice output command is supplied, voice data specified from a register value or the like as a parameter is supplied to the voice processing circuit 136.

The data capacity of the moving image data tends to be larger than that of other production data. If moving image data having a large data capacity is stored in advance in VRAM 144 or the like, the work area of VDP 135 may be compressed. Therefore, it is difficult to store moving image data having a large data capacity in the VRAM 144 or the like in advance, and it is necessary to read the moving image data from the effect data memory 123 every time it is used. When the moving image reproduction command from the CPU 131 is supplied, the VDP 135 sends a moving image data read request to the memory controller 122 to read the moving image data stored in the effect data memory 123.

16 to 18 are sequence diagrams showing an example of moving image reproduction control corresponding to the case where a moving image reproduction command is supplied. FIG. 16 shows a case where the inspection is OK in which the inspection result of the moving image data (read data) read from the effect data memory 123 is normal. FIG. 17 shows a case where the data refresh is successful in the effect data memory 123. FIG. 18 shows a case of defective block detection in which a defective block is detected in the effect data memory 123.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the VDP 135, when a moving image reproduction command from the CPU 131 is received, a moving image data reading request requesting reading of moving image data specified from a register value or the like as a parameter is sent to the memory controller 122. Supply. The memory controller 122 sets the read standby signal to be output to the CPU 131 to ON in response to the request for reading the moving image data. After that, reading of moving image data is started. When the reading of the moving image data is completed, error detection and error correction of the read moving image data are performed. As a result, when the reading of the moving image data is completed, the VDP 135 starts the reproduction display of the moving image on the screen of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the reproduction display of the moving image is not started until all the moving image data is read, and the read moving image data is used every time the moving image data of a predetermined unit is read completed. The reproduction display of the moving image may proceed in sequence. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, in the reproduction display of the moving image, the video output in the image display device 5 and the audio output in the speakers 8L and 8R are executed in synchronization and cooperate with each other. And proceed.

Further, the memory controller 122 inspects the read data by using the execution results of error detection and error correction. For example, the inspection result of the read data is determined according to whether or not the number of error bits specified by error detection exceeds the error threshold value and whether or not there is sector data that cannot be corrected by error correction. At this time, if it is determined that the inspection result of the read data is normal, the stored data of the effect data memory 123 has been read normally, so the read standby signal to be output to the CPU 131 is set to off. After that, when the reproduction display of the moving image under the control of the VDP135 or the like is completed, the VDP135 may notify the CPU 131 of the completion of the moving image reproduction.

In the case shown in FIG. 17, the memory controller 122 determines that the inspection result of the read data is abnormal. In this case, data refresh is started for the sector data stored in the effect data memory 123. After that, when the data refresh is normally completed, the stored data in the effect data memory 123 can be newly read, so the read standby signal to be output to the CPU 131 is set to off. Note that data refresh based on the inspection result of the read data is executed according to the execution result of error detection and error correction, so even if it can be executed after the playback display of the moving image under the control of VDP135 or the like is started. Good. As a result, even when the data refresh for the stored data of the effect data memory 123 is executed, it is possible to prevent a delay in the reproduction display of the moving image and execute the effect by appropriately reproducing and displaying the moving image. On the other hand, if the reproduction display of the moving image under the control of VDP135 or the like is not started and waits until the data refresh is completed, the reproduction display of the moving image will be delayed.

In the case shown in FIG. 18, after the data refresh is started by the memory controller 122, the data refresh is interrupted because a defective block that becomes a defective area is detected. In this case, in response to the detection of the defective block, data transfer is started for the sector data of the erase unit block stored in the effect data memory 123. After that, in the effect data memory 123, the data transfer from the defective block which is the defective area in the data area to the alternative block which is the alternative area in the redundant area is completed, and the stored data of the effect data memory 123 can be newly read. Then, the read standby signal output to the CPU 131 is set to off. As with the data refresh, the data transfer executed after the data refresh based on the detection result of the read data may be executed after the reproduction display of the moving image under the control of VDP135 or the like is started. As a result, even when data transfer to the stored data of the effect data memory 123 is executed, it is possible to prevent a delay in the reproduction display of the moving image and execute an effect by appropriately reproducing and displaying the moving image. On the other hand, when the playback display of the moving image under the control of VDP135 or the like is not started and waits until the data transfer from the defective area to the alternative area is completed, it is compared with the case where the data refresh is completed normally. Therefore, the reproduction display of the moving image will be further delayed.

In the case shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the inspection result of the read data is determined to be abnormal, the data refresh is continuously started. In the case shown in FIG. 18, after the data refresh is started, the data transfer is continuously started when a defective block that becomes a defective area is detected. In this way, the data refresh or data transfer may be executed immediately after the reading is performed according to the inspection result for the reading data of the effect data memory 123. On the other hand, the execution result of error detection and error correction for the read data of the effect data memory 123 is stored in the effect data memory 123, and when the memory inspection interval elapses, the data refresh condition and the data transfer condition are set. Data refresh and data transfer may be feasible in response to the establishment.

In the moving image reproduction control example shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, when a moving image reproduction command is supplied from the CPU 131 to the VDP 135, the VDP 135 supplies a moving image data read request to the memory controller 122 to obtain the moving image data. Is starting to read. On the other hand, the command corresponding to the moving image data read request may be supplied from the CPU 131 to the memory controller 122. When the CPU 131 determines to start reproducing the moving image from the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern, it is said that the effect data read condition is satisfied in step S272 of the controlled effect data transfer process shown in FIG. judge. Therefore, by controlling step S274, the CPU 131 may supply a command corresponding to the moving image data read request to the memory controller 122. However, if the CPU 131 supplies a moving image reproduction command to the VDP 135 and the CPU 131 supplies a command corresponding to the moving image data read request to the memory controller 122, the processing load of the CPU 131 may increase. is there. On the other hand, as in the moving image reproduction control example shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, when the VDP 135 receives the moving image reproduction command supplied from the CPU 131, the VDP 135 supplies the moving image data read request to the memory controller 122. By doing so, the processing load for reading the moving image data is distributed, so that the processing load of the CPU 131 can be reduced.

When starting the reproduction display of a moving image, a delay may occur due to various factors. For example, as in the moving image reproduction control example shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a delay may occur due to data refresh or data transfer based on the inspection result of the read data. In addition, when the control to start the controlled memory inspection is performed in step 257 of the controlled memory inspection process shown in FIG. 10, the stored data of the effect data memory 123 becomes unreadable and the controlled memory inspection ends. Until then, the playback display of moving images may be delayed. Further, in the effect data memory 123 configured by using the NAND flash memory, the reproduction display of the moving image may be delayed due to the reading of the stored data by random access. The effect data memory 123 configured by using the NAND flash memory reads the stored data in sector units. Since the moving image data tends to have a larger data capacity than other effect data, it may be stored in the effect data memory 123 over a plurality of sectors. In the effect data memory 123, when the effect data such as moving image data is stored over a plurality of sectors, it is necessary to access each sector and read the stored data. In this case, since random access to the effect data memory 123 frequently occurs, the reading of the stored data is delayed, and the reproduction display of the moving image is also affected by the delay.

Among the effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is an effect in which a delay is likely to occur depending on the read permission / rejection state of the effect data memory 123, as in the case where the reproduction display of a moving image is executed. On the other hand, there is also an effect that can be executed without delay regardless of the read permission / rejection state of the effect data memory 123. For example, the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132 may include the effect control execution data for executing the start winning notification SH1. The start winning notification SH1 lights the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the lighting accessory 90 for production, and other decorative LEDs when the first start prize or the second start prize occurs at the start opening. The occurrence of the start winning prize is notified by the mode, the operation in the movable members 32A and 32B for effect, and a combination of a part or all of them. Further, the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132 may include the effect control execution data for executing the post-reach effect AR1 and the post-reach effect AR2. The post-reach effect AR1 outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state, for example, in response to the period during which the reproduction display of the moving image is normally started. The start of the reach effect is notified by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the lighting accessory 90 for the effect, and other decorative LEDs, the operation of the movable members 32A and 32B for the effect, and a combination of a part or all of them. In addition, the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132 may include the effect control execution data for executing the error notification EH1. The error notification EH1 is a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting mode in the game effect lamp 9, the lighting accessory 90 for production, and other decorative LEDs, and a part or all of them when an error occurs in which various errors occur. The occurrence of an abnormality is notified by the combination of. Alternatively, the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132 may include the effect control execution data for executing the advance notice effect YA1. The notice effect YA1 is the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the effect lighting accessory 90 and other decorative LEDs, and the effect movable members 32A and 32B during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is suggested that the operation in the above, a part or a combination of all of them, is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state.

19 and 20 are sequence diagrams showing a control example when the start winning notification SH1 is executed. FIG. 19 shows a case where there is no read delay in reading the moving image data and there is no read delay. FIG. 20 shows a case where there is a read delay in which a delay occurs in reading the moving image data. In the control examples shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the control up to the start of the reach effect is common. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the variable display start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Will be done. For example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 makes settings for transmitting a variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command in step S112 of the game control process process shown in FIG. .. In the effect control board 12, the CPU 131 executes the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 in response to receiving the variable display start command, and the decorative symbol is set by the setting in step S205 or the like. Start variable display of. In this way, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display start setting of the decorative symbol is performed, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, the pre-reach effect BR1 may be executed. The pre-reach effect BR1 may be an effect that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled by the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as the variable display effect of "sliding" or "pseudo-ream". Alternatively, the pre-reach effect BR1 may be an effect that suggests that the game is controlled to a big hit game state regardless of the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, such as a notice effect. After that, in response to reaching the reach establishment in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the execution of the reach effect is started, and the reach effect is started.

In the control example shown in FIG. 19, as a reach effect, the reproduction display of the moving image is started without delay. After the reproduction display of the moving image is started, the start winning prize notification SH1 is executed at the time of the starting winning when the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. The start winning notification SH1 can be executed without delay at the time of starting winning by reading the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132 in response to the occurrence of the starting winning. The start winning notification SH1 is a passing area (starting area) through which a game ball can pass, such as a first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A or a second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. ) Is included in the passage assistance effect regarding the passage of the game ball. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes the audio output in the speakers 8L and 8R executed in synchronization with the video output on the screen of the image display device 5. This audio output is included in the display auxiliary effect related to the display of the image display device 5.

After the execution of the reach effect is started in the control example shown in FIG. 19, the post-reach effect AR10 may be executed. The post-reach effect AR10 may be an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, such as a cut-in display of an effect image prepared in advance. Alternatively, the post-reach effect AR10 may be an effect that does not suggest that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a video output or an audio output that explains the content of the reach effect. In the control example shown in FIG. 19, after the reproduction display of the moving image started without delay is completed, the shaking display of the decorative symbol is started. Subsequently, the execution of the reach effect ends, the reach effect ends, and the variable display of the special symbol ends. In response to the end of the variable display, the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped) and confirmed. The decorative pattern is displayed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 20, a period in which the reading of the moving image data used for executing the playback display of the moving image included in the reach effect is delayed and the playback display of the moving image is stopped without being started. There is. When the first start prize or the second start prize occurs during this display stop period, the start prize notification SH1 is executed even during the display stop period. For example, if the effect control execution data used for executing the start winning notification SH1 includes a part or all of the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the motor control data, but does not include the display control data. Good. Alternatively, the effect control execution data used for executing the start winning notification SH1 is the effect control execution data including a part or all of the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the motor control data, and the effect control execution including only the display control data. The data may be prepared separately. When the read standby signal output from the memory controller 123 is on, the CPU 131 does not use the effect control execution data including only the display control data, and does not use the voice control data, the lamp control data, a part of the motor control data, or The start winning notification SH1 may be made executable by using the effect control execution data including all of them. For example, the CPU 131 executes the effect control prepared in response to the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the effect setting at the time of the start prize is set in step S161 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Data is read from ROM 132. Since the start winning notification SH1 is executed using the effect control execution data read out at this time, the start winning notification SH1 can be executed even during the display stop period without being affected by the delay in the reproduction display of the moving image.

After the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed in the control example shown in FIG. 20 is started, the post-reach effect AR10 may be executed. In this control example, the swaying display of the decorative symbol is started before the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred ends. The timing at which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is started is determined in advance by the effect control process timer determination value set in the effect control pattern read from the ROM 132 regardless of whether or not the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed. It suffices if it is done. In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern to be confirmed is accompanied by slight shaking and expansion and contraction. Is displayed, and the display state waits until the stop display (complete stop display) is displayed. The decorative symbol to be the final display is a final decorative symbol derived as a display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and may be the final stop symbol determined in step S201 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. Just do it. The swaying display period in which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is performed may be a period until a time preset in the effect control pattern elapses, for example, 2 seconds. During this shaking display period, the playback display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred is continuously executed. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes an audio output executed in synchronization with the video output as a display auxiliary effect related to the display on the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, if there is a delay in the playback display of the moving image, the audio output that serves as the display auxiliary effect can be delayed and executed according to the stop period of the playback display due to the delay, and even during the shaking display period, it can be executed. Control of the audio output, which is a delayed display auxiliary effect, is executed. In this way, the shaking display period can be a period during which control delayed due to the occurrence of read delay can be executed.

For example, when the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern PA2-3 or the variable pattern PA3-3 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result becomes long. , The moving image data used for executing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image also tends to have a large data capacity. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a delay will occur in the reproduction display of the moving image. Therefore, when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a long variable display time is executed, the shaking display period is longer than when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a short variable display time is executed. May be set to. As a result, even when the reproduction display of the moving image is likely to be delayed, the possibility of completing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred can be improved, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented by an appropriate effect without discomfort. ..

In the control example shown in FIG. 20, when the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed is started, the video output by the reproduction display of the moving image may be faded in. For example, when starting the reproduction display of the delayed moving image, the blending rate of the moving image may be initially set to "0" and updated so as to increase the blending rate with the passage of time. By fading in the video output of the delayed moving image reproduction display in this way, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the display effect using the moving image when the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed.

FIG. 21 shows an execution example of the start winning notification SH1. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), when the game ball passes through the starting area included in the passing area, such as the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, for example, it is shown in FIG. 21 (B1). By outputting the voice of "picone!" From the speakers 8L and 8R, the start winning notification SH1 is executed. Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the starting area, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), a decorative LED provided inside or around the normally variable winning ball device 6A emits a predetermined light such as blue or yellow. The start winning notification SH1 is executed by emitting light (lighting) with a color (lamp lighting color).

As shown in FIG. 21 (C), the start winning notification SH1 has different audio output contents and lamp lighting colors corresponding to each of the plurality of hold display colors due to different winning execution ratios depending on the winning determination result. May be executed. For the winning determination result, for example, using the numerical data indicating the random value extracted in step S12 of the game control process process shown in FIG. 4, it was determined whether or not the winning game state is controlled as the advantageous state. The result will do. By making a determination in step S12, it suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled before determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. The winning determination result may include a "big hit" when the jackpot game state is controlled and a "loss" when the jackpot game state is not controlled. Alternatively, the winning judgment result is determined to be a specific variation pattern in which a specific effect such as a reach effect of super reach is executed in place of "big hit" and "loss", or in addition to "big hit" and "loss". It may include the determination result in the case of being determined and the determination result in the case where the specific fluctuation pattern is not determined. The hold display color is the display color of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, a hold display that can specify the number of holds for the variable display is performed based on the hold storage information related to the variable display. As shown in FIG. 21C, by setting the content of the audio output corresponding to the hold display color and the lamp lighting color, the start winning notification SH1 can be executed in a different effect mode depending on the display mode of the hold display. .. In the example shown in FIG. 21C, both the content of the audio output and the lamp lighting color are set corresponding to the hold display color. On the other hand, corresponding to the hold display color, only one of the audio output content or the lamp lighting color may be set, and the other may be set with a certain content regardless of the hold display color.

22 and 23 are sequence diagrams showing a control example when the post-reach effect AR1 is executed. FIG. 22 shows a case where there is no read delay in which there is no delay in reading the moving image data. FIG. 23 shows a case where there is a read delay in which a delay occurs in reading the moving image data. In the control examples shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the control from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect is common, as in the control examples of FIGS. 19 and 20.

In the control example shown in FIG. 22, as a reach effect, the reproduction display of the moving image is started without delay. After the reproduction display of the moving image is started, the post-reach effect AR1 is executed. The post-reach effect AR1 can be executed without delay during the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, by using the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. The post-reach effect AR1 may be executed when, for example, an operation by a player who presses the push button 31B is detected and the effect execution condition is satisfied based on the detection result. Alternatively, the post-reach effect AR1 may be executed when the effect execution timing during the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, regardless of the detection result of the movement by the player. The post-reach effect AR1 in which the effect execution condition is satisfied based on the detection result of the motion by the player is included in the detection auxiliary effect related to the detection of the motion by the player. Regardless of the detection result of the movement by the player, for example, the post-reach effect AR1 for operating the effect movable members 32A and 32B by the driving force of the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B is included in the operation assist effect related to the operation of the movable object. .. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes the audio output in the speakers 8L and 8R executed in synchronization with the video output on the screen of the image display device 5. This audio output is included in the display auxiliary effect related to the display of the image display device 5.

After the post-reach effect AR1 is executed in the control example shown in FIG. 22, the post-reach effect AR2 may be further executed. The post-reach effect AR2 may be an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, such as a cut-in display of an effect image prepared in advance. Alternatively, the post-reach effect AR2 may be an effect that does not suggest that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a video output or an audio output that explains the content of the reach effect. In the control example shown in FIG. 22, after the reproduction display of the moving image started without delay is completed, the shaking display of the decorative symbol is started. Subsequently, the execution of the reach effect ends, the reach effect ends, and the variable display of the special symbol ends. In response to the end of the variable display, the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped) and confirmed. The decorative pattern is displayed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 23, there is a delay in reading the moving image data used to execute the playback display of the moving image included in the reach effect, and the playback display of the moving image is stopped without being started. There is. If the effect execution condition is satisfied during this display stop period, or if the effect execution timing is reached, the post-reach effect AR1 is executed even during the display stop period. For example, if the effect control execution data used for executing the post-reach effect AR1 includes a part or all of the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the motor control data, but does not include the display control data. Good. Alternatively, the effect control execution data used for executing the post-reach effect AR1 includes effect control execution data including a part or all of voice control data, lamp control data, and motor control data, and effect control execution including only display control data. The data may be prepared separately. When the read standby signal output from the memory controller 123 is on, the CPU 131 does not use the effect control execution data including only the display control data, and does not use the voice control data, the lamp control data, a part of the motor control data, or The post-reach effect AR1 may be made executable by using the effect control execution data including all of them. For example, when the CPU 131 determines in step S223 that the control data read condition is satisfied based on the timer value of the effect process timer updated in step S222 of the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 9, FIG. Read out the effect control execution data that constitutes the effect control pattern determined in step 203 shown in. Since the post-reach effect AR1 is executed using the effect control execution data read out at this time, the post-reach effect AR1 can be executed even during the display stop period without being affected by the delay in the reproduction display of the moving image.

After the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed in the control example shown in FIG. 23 is started, the post-reach effect AR2 may be executed as in the case of FIG. 22. In this control example, the swaying display of the decorative symbol is started before the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred ends. The timing at which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is started is determined in advance by the effect control process timer determination value set in the effect control pattern read from the ROM 132 regardless of whether or not the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed. It suffices if it is done. In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern to be confirmed is accompanied by slight shaking and expansion and contraction. Is displayed, and the display state waits until the stop display (complete stop display) is displayed. The swaying display period in which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is performed may be a period until a time preset in the effect control pattern elapses, for example, 2 seconds. During this shaking display period, the playback display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred is continuously executed. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes an audio output executed in synchronization with the video output as a display auxiliary effect related to the display on the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, if there is a delay in the playback display of the moving image, the audio output that serves as the display auxiliary effect can be delayed and executed according to the stop period of the playback display due to the delay, and even during the shaking display period, it can be executed. Control of the audio output, which is a delayed display auxiliary effect, is executed. In this way, the shaking display period can be a period during which control delayed due to the occurrence of read delay can be executed.

For example, when the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern PA2-3 or the variable pattern PA3-3 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result becomes long. , The moving image data used for executing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image also tends to have a large data capacity. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a delay will occur in the reproduction display of the moving image. Therefore, when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a long variable display time is executed, the shaking display period is longer than when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a short variable display time is executed. May be set to. As a result, even when the reproduction display of the moving image is likely to be delayed, the possibility of completing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred can be improved, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented by an appropriate effect without discomfort. ..

In the control example shown in FIG. 23, when the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed is started, the video output by the reproduction display of the moving image may be faded in. For example, when starting the reproduction display of the delayed moving image, the blending rate of the moving image may be initially set to "0" and updated so as to increase the blending rate with the passage of time. By fading in the video output of the delayed moving image reproduction display in this way, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the display effect using the moving image when the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed.

FIG. 24 shows an execution example of the post-reach effect AR1. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), when the effect execution condition is satisfied based on the detection of an operation by the player, such as a continuous hit operation in which the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, for example, FIG. The post-reach effect AR1 is executed by the voice output that outputs the voice of "Churns!" Shown in 1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, when the effect execution condition is satisfied, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (B2), the post-reach effect AR1 is executed according to the lighting mode for lighting the effect lighting accessory 90. Alternatively, when the effect execution condition is satisfied, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (B3), the effect movable members 32A and 32B are operated (advanced) by the driving force of the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B to perform after reach. The production AR1 is executed. The post-reach effect AR1 may be an effect that can be performed by any one of the audio output, the lighting mode, the operation of the movable member, or a combination of a part or all of them.

As shown in FIG. 24C, the post-reach effect AR1 may be made executable by different operation execution ratios depending on the variable display result. The variable display result may be, for example, the result determined by using the random number value in step S102 of the game control process process shown in FIG. The variable display result may include a "big hit" corresponding to the case of being controlled to the big hit gaming state and a "loss" corresponding to the case of not being controlled to the big hit gaming state. Alternatively, the variable display result can be replaced with "big hit" and "loss", or in addition to "big hit" and "loss", "probability change" corresponding to the case where the probability change state is reached after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit. It may include "non-probability change" corresponding to the case where the probable change state is not reached after the end of the game state. The operation execution ratio shown in FIG. 24C is set to be higher when the variable display result is "big hit" than when the variable display result is "missing". Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit", the post-reach effect AR1 is more likely to be executed than when the variable display result is "missing". It should be noted that the effect mode of the post-reach effect AR1 may be determined at a different rate depending on the variable display result, without being limited to the one in which the execution ratio during operation is different according to the variable display result. In this case, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit gaming state can be different depending on the effect mode of the post-reach effect AR1. Further, the operation execution ratio may be different according to the fluctuation pattern, or the production mode of the post-reach effect AR1 may be determined at a different ratio according to the fluctuation pattern.

The post-reach effect AR1 detects an action by the player who presses the push button 31B when the promotion notification for prompting the player's action is not executed, and executes the effect when the effect execution condition is satisfied based on the detection result. May be done. During the display stop period in which the playback display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, the action by the player who presses the push button 31B is detected when the promotion notification for prompting the player's action is not executed. Therefore, the post-reach effect AR1 may be executed depending on the detection result.

As a promotion notification for encouraging the player's operation, the remaining time of the operation valid period may be notified by displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The operation valid period is an effective detection period for effectively detecting an operation by a player who presses and operates the push button 31B. In the display stop period in which the playback display of the moving image is stopped without being started due to a delay, the remaining time of the operation valid period may not be notified or the display of the remaining time may not be updated. In order to control the progress of the effect when the promotion notification is not properly executed during the display stop period, the remaining time of the operation valid period may be continuously reduced as in the normal case without delay. , The measurement of the remaining time may be temporarily stopped so as not to decrease unlike the normal case where there is no delay. Each time an operation by a player who presses and operates the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, the post-reach effect AR1 is executed at the operation execution ratio according to the variable display result as shown in FIG. 24 (C). You just have to decide whether or not to do it. Then, when it is determined to execute the post-reach effect AR1, any one, or a part or all of the audio output, the lighting mode, and the operation of the movable member shown in FIGS. 24 (B1) to 24 (B3). Depending on the combination of, the post-reach effect AR1 may be executed.

FIG. 25 is a timing diagram showing a control example when updating the remaining time of the operation valid period. 25 (A1) and 25 (A2) show a case where there is no delay in reading the moving image data and there is no read delay. FIGS. 25 (B1) to 25 (B3) show a case where there is a read delay in which the read of the moving image data is delayed. The timing at which the moving image playback shown in FIG. 25 (A1) is changed from "none" to "yes" is the playback start setting timing specified by the display control data included in the effect control execution data constituting the effect control pattern. Yes, it is the timing set as the start of playback of the moving image at the design stage.

For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A1), when there is no read delay in reading the moving image data, the remaining time of the operation valid period corresponds to the playback start setting timing in FIG. 25 (A2). The initial setting time T0 as shown in is set. The remaining time of the operation valid period may be measured by using the timer value of the valid period timer provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 133, for example. As shown in FIG. 25 (A2), after the initial set time T0 is set corresponding to the playback start setting timing, the remaining time of the operation valid period is reduced with the passage of time. Then, when the remaining time of the operation valid period becomes "0", the operation valid period ends. If the end condition of the operation valid period is satisfied based on the detection result of the operation by the player who presses the push button 31B before the remaining time of the operation valid period becomes "0", that time point. You may end the operation validity period with. The end condition of the operation valid period can be satisfied in advance based on the detection of the operation, for example, when it is determined to execute the post-reach effect AR1 at the operation execution ratio shown in FIG. 24 (C). It suffices if it is determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B1), even when there is a read delay in which the reading of the moving image data is delayed, the remaining time of the operation valid period corresponds to the playback start setting timing in FIG. 25 (B2). ) And (B3), the initial setting time T0 is set. As an example of subsequent control, as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the remaining time of the operation valid period is reduced as in the case of no read delay, and when the remaining time becomes "0", the operation valid period becomes You may quit. As another example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), the remaining time of the operation valid period may be temporarily stopped so as not to decrease as the start of reproduction of the moving image is delayed. In this case, unlike the case where there is no read delay, in the display stop period in which the playback start of the moving image is delayed and the display is stopped, the timer stop control for maintaining the timer value of the valid period timer without updating it is performed. You just have to do it.

FIG. 25C shows a display example of the meter image MT1 as an execution example of the promotion notification. In this display example, the meter image MT1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 together with the effect image MS1 indicating the character for notifying the message of "press!" And the effect image BT1 indicating the character corresponding to the push button 31B. Will be done. The meter image MT1 may be displayed updatable using video data separated from the moving image data. In this case, due to the read delay that causes a delay in reading the moving image data, the update of the meter image MT1 display is also stopped during the display stop period. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), if the remaining time of the operation valid period is reduced even when there is a read delay as in the case where there is no read delay, the operation notified by the display state of the meter image MT1. There may be a difference between the remaining time of the valid period and the remaining time of the operation valid period actually measured using the timer value of the valid period timer. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), if the operation valid period is temporarily stopped so as not to reduce the remaining time of the operation valid period when there is a read delay, the operation valid period notified by the display state of the meter image MT1 The difference between the remaining time and the remaining time of the operation valid period actually measured by using the timer value of the valid period timer is eliminated, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented by an appropriate effect without discomfort. However, by controlling the timer stop, an operation valid period longer than that in the design stage is provided. Therefore, in the design stage, the operation by the player at an unintended timing is detected, and the post-reach effect AR1 There is a possibility that a problem may occur due to the execution of.

The meter image MT1 shown in FIG. 25C may be displayed updatable by animation display or the like using still image data prepared separately from the moving image data. The still image data used for the update display of the meter image MT1 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the VRAM 144 or the like. The update display of the meter image MT1 may be controlled by using the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern read from the ROM 132 by the CPU 131. In this case, due to a read delay that causes a delay in reading the moving image data, the update of the meter image MT1 display may also be stopped during the display stop period. Even during the display stop period, the display of the meter image MT1 may be updated by using the still image data stored in advance in the VRAM 144. Even if the update display of the meter image MT1 is stopped during the display stop period, when the display stop period ends, the display state will be the same as when there is no read delay, depending on the setting in the effect control execution data. The display of the meter image MT1 may be updated. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), in the case of reducing the remaining time of the operation valid period even when there is a read delay as in the case where there is no read delay, the meter is at least after the display stop period ends. There is no difference between the remaining time of the operation valid period notified by the display state of the image MT1 and the remaining time of the operation valid period actually measured using the timer value of the valid period timer, and an appropriate effect without discomfort is achieved. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. However, when the display stop period ends, the display state of the meter image MT1 may change discontinuously, so that the display of the meter image MT1 may feel uncomfortable and a problem may occur. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), if the operation is temporarily stopped so as not to reduce the remaining time of the operation valid period when there is a read delay, the meter image MT1 is displayed at least after the display stop period is completed. There may be a difference between the remaining time of the operation valid period notified by the state and the remaining time of the operation valid period actually measured by using the timer value of the valid period timer. In the CPU 131 or VDP 135, when the timer stop control for the valid period timer is performed during the display stop period, the update display stop control for stopping the update display of the meter image MT1 may be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects by providing an appropriate effect that does not give a sense of discomfort.

The post-reach effect AR1 for operating (advancing) the effect movable members 32A and 32B shown in FIG. 24 (B3) may be executed regardless of the detection result of the operation by the player. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variable pattern is determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. Then, in the specific effect control pattern determined in response to the specific variation pattern, when the effect execution timing is reached as the motor control data included in the effect control execution data associated with the effect control process timer determination value. The data used for executing the post-reach effect AR1 for operating (advancing) the effect movable members 32A and 32B may be set in advance. Such a specific effect control pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the variable display result. The determination ratio may be set to be higher when the variable display result is "big hit" than when the variable display result is "missing". With this setting, when the variable display result is "big hit", the post-reach effect AR1 is more likely to be executed than when the variable display result is "missing". It should be noted that the execution ratio of the post-reach effect AR1 that operates the effect movable members 32A and 32B is not limited to different depending on the variable display result, and the effect movable members 32A and 32B are operated at different ratios according to the variable display result. The operation mode of the above may be determined. In this case, depending on the operation mode of the effect movable members 32A and 32B, the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and the degree of expectation controlled in the big hit game state can be different.

26 and 27 are sequence diagrams showing a control example when the error notification EH1 is executed. FIG. 26 shows a case where there is no read delay in reading the moving image data and there is no read delay. FIG. 27 shows a case where there is a read delay in which the read of the moving image data is delayed. In the control examples shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the control from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect is common, as in the control examples of FIGS. 19 and 20.

In the control example shown in FIG. 26, as a reach effect, the reproduction display of the moving image is started without delay. After the reproduction display of the moving image is started, the error notification EH1 is executed when the error is detected when the occurrence of the error is detected. The error notification EH1 can be executed without delay at the time of error detection by reading the effect control execution data stored in the ROM 132 in response to the detection of the error occurrence. The error notification EH1 is included in the abnormality notification auxiliary effect related to notification of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes the audio output in the speakers 8L and 8R executed in synchronization with the video output on the screen of the image display device 5. This audio output is included in the display auxiliary effect related to the display of the image display device 5.

After the execution of the reach effect is started in the control example shown in FIG. 26, the post-reach effect AR10 may be executed. The post-reach effect AR10 may be an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, such as a cut-in display of an effect image prepared in advance. Alternatively, the post-reach effect AR10 may be an effect that does not suggest that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a video output or an audio output that explains the content of the reach effect. In the control example shown in FIG. 26, the shaking display of the decorative symbol is started after the reproduction display of the moving image started without delay is completed. Subsequently, the execution of the reach effect ends, the reach effect ends, and the variable display of the special symbol ends. In response to the end of the variable display, the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped) and confirmed. The decorative pattern is displayed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 27, a period in which the reading of the moving image data used for executing the playback display of the moving image included in the reach effect is delayed and the playback display of the moving image is stopped without being started. There is. If an error is detected in the pachinko gaming machine 1 during this display stop period, the error notification EH1 is executed even during the display stop period. For example, the effect control execution data used for executing the error notification EH1 may be configured so as to include a part or all of the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the motor control data, but not the display control data. .. Alternatively, the effect control execution data used for executing the error notification EH1 is the effect control execution data including a part or all of the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the motor control data, and the effect control execution data including only the display control data. And may be prepared separately. When the read standby signal output from the memory controller 123 is on, the CPU 131 does not use the effect control execution data including only the display control data, and does not use the voice control data, the lamp control data, a part of the motor control data, or The error notification EH1 may be made executable by using the effect control execution data including all of them. For example, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6, the CPU 131 outputs the effect control execution data prepared in advance in response to the case where the occurrence of an error is detected when the error notification process in step S60 is executed from the ROM 132. read out. Since the error notification EH1 is executed using the effect control execution data read out at this time, the error notification EH1 can be executed even during the display stop period without being affected by the delay in the reproduction display of the moving image.

After the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed in the control example shown in FIG. 27 is started, the post-reach effect AR10 may be executed. In this control example, the swaying display of the decorative symbol is started before the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred ends. The timing at which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is started is determined in advance by the effect control process timer determination value set in the effect control pattern read from the ROM 132 regardless of whether or not the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed. It suffices if it is done. In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern to be confirmed is accompanied by slight shaking and expansion and contraction. Is displayed, and the display state waits until the stop display (complete stop display) is displayed. The swaying display period in which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is performed may be a period until a time preset in the effect control pattern elapses, for example, 2 seconds. During this shaking display period, the playback display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred is continuously executed. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes an audio output executed in synchronization with the video output as a display auxiliary effect related to the display on the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, if there is a delay in the playback display of the moving image, the audio output that serves as the display auxiliary effect can be delayed and executed according to the stop period of the playback display due to the delay, and even during the shaking display period, it can be executed. Control of the audio output, which is a delayed display auxiliary effect, is executed. In this way, the shaking display period can be a period during which control delayed due to the occurrence of read delay can be executed.

For example, when the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern PA2-3 or the variable pattern PA3-3 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result becomes long. , The moving image data used for executing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image also tends to have a large data capacity. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a delay will occur in the reproduction display of the moving image. Therefore, when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a long variable display time is executed, the shaking display period is longer than when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a short variable display time is executed. May be set to. As a result, even when the reproduction display of the moving image is likely to be delayed, the possibility of completing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred can be improved, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented by an appropriate effect without discomfort. ..

In the control example shown in FIG. 27, when the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed is started, the video output by the reproduction display of the moving image may be faded in. For example, when starting the reproduction display of the delayed moving image, the blending rate of the moving image may be initially set to "0" and updated so as to increase the blending rate with the passage of time. By fading in the video output of the delayed moving image reproduction display in this way, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the display effect using the moving image when the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed.

FIG. 28 shows an execution example of the error notification EH1. When an error related to a power supply error (power supply error) such as an error due to a short-circuit error of the switch power supply is detected, the message "Power supply error detected" is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (A). The error notification EH1 is executed by outputting the sound to be notified from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, when an error due to the front door being opened (door opening error) is detected, a voice for notifying the message "door is open" as shown in FIG. 28 (B). Is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, so that the error notification EH1 is executed. Alternatively, if an error (full tank error) is detected due to the lower plate being full with the game ball, the message "Please pull out the ball" is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (C). The error notification EH1 is executed by outputting the sound to be notified from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6, when the error notification process is executed in step S60, any of the plurality of errors may occur depending on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Determine if it has occurred. Corresponding to this determination result, the effect control execution data for error notification stored in the ROM 132 is selected and read, and the error notification EH1 is executed using the read effect control execution data. As a result, the error notification EH1 included in the abnormality notification auxiliary effect may be executed in a different effect mode depending on the determined abnormality.

29 and 30 are sequence diagrams showing a control example when the notice effect AY1 is executed. FIG. 29 shows a case where there is no read delay in reading the moving image data and there is no read delay. FIG. 30 shows a case where there is a read delay in which a delay occurs in reading the moving image data. In the control examples shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the control from the start of the variable display to the start of the reach effect is common, as in the control examples of FIGS. 19 and 20.

In the control example shown in FIG. 29, as a reach effect, the reproduction display of the moving image is started without delay. After the reproduction display of the moving image is started, the advance notice effect YA1 is executed. The advance notice effect YA1 can be executed without delay during the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, by using the effect control execution data included in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the advance notice effect pattern. The advance notice effect YA1 is executed when a predetermined advance notice execution timing is reached in response to the effect control process timer determination value set in the effect control pattern during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The advance notice production YA1 is included in the advance notice auxiliary production regarding the advance notice. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes the audio output in the speakers 8L and 8R executed in synchronization with the video output on the screen of the image display device 5. This audio output is included in the display auxiliary effect related to the display of the image display device 5.

After the advance notice effect YA1 is executed in the control example shown in FIG. 29, the post-reach effect AR10 may be executed. The post-reach effect AR10 may be an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, such as a cut-in display of an effect image prepared in advance. Alternatively, the post-reach effect AR10 may be an effect that does not suggest that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a video output or an audio output that explains the content of the reach effect. In the control example shown in FIG. 29, the shaking display of the decorative symbol is started after the reproduction display of the moving image started without delay is completed. Subsequently, the execution of the reach effect ends, the reach effect ends, and the variable display of the special symbol ends. In response to the end of the variable display, the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped (completely stopped) and confirmed. The decorative pattern is displayed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 30, a period in which the reading of the moving image data used for executing the playback display of the moving image included in the reach effect is delayed and the playback display of the moving image is stopped without being started. There is. When the notice execution timing is reached during this display stop period, the notice effect YA1 is executed even during the display stop period. For example, the effect control execution data used for executing the advance notice effect YA1 may be configured to include a part or all of the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the motor control data, but not the display control data. .. Alternatively, the effect control execution data used for executing the advance notice effect YA1 includes effect control execution data including a part or all of voice control data, lamp control data, and motor control data, and effect control execution data including only display control data. And may be prepared separately. When the read standby signal output from the memory controller 123 is on, the CPU 131 does not use the effect control execution data including only the display control data, and does not use the voice control data, the lamp control data, a part of the motor control data, or The advance notice effect YA1 may be made executable by using the effect control execution data including all of them. For example, when the CPU 131 determines in step S223 that the control data read condition is satisfied based on the timer value of the effect process timer updated in step S222 of the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 9, FIG. Read out the effect control execution data that constitutes the effect control pattern determined in step 203 shown in. Since the advance notice effect YA1 is executed using the effect control execution data read out at this time, the advance notice effect YA1 can be executed even during the display stop period without being affected by the delay in the reproduction display of the moving image.

After the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed in the control example shown in FIG. 30 is started, the post-reach effect AR10 may be executed as in the case of FIG. 29. In this control example, the swaying display of the decorative symbol is started before the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred ends. The timing at which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is started is determined in advance by the effect control process timer determination value set in the effect control pattern read from the ROM 132 regardless of whether or not the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed. It suffices if it is done. In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern to be confirmed is accompanied by slight shaking and expansion and contraction. Is displayed, and the display state waits until the stop display (complete stop display) is displayed. The swaying display period in which the swaying display of the decorative pattern is performed may be a period until a time preset in the effect control pattern elapses, for example, 2 seconds. During this shaking display period, the playback display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred is continuously executed. The reach effect by reproducing and displaying the moving image includes an audio output executed in synchronization with the video output as a display auxiliary effect related to the display on the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, if there is a delay in the playback display of the moving image, the audio output that serves as the display auxiliary effect can be delayed and executed according to the stop period of the playback display due to the delay, and even during the shaking display period, it can be executed. Control of the audio output, which is a delayed display auxiliary effect, is executed. In this way, the shaking display period can be a period during which control delayed due to the occurrence of read delay can be executed.

For example, when the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern PA2-3 or the variable pattern PA3-3 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, the variable display time from the start of the variable display to the derivation of the display result becomes long. , The moving image data used for executing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image also tends to have a large data capacity. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a delay will occur in the reproduction display of the moving image. Therefore, when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a long variable display time is executed, the shaking display period is longer than when the variable display corresponding to the variable display having a short variable display time is executed. May be set to. As a result, even when the reproduction display of the moving image is likely to be delayed, the possibility of completing the reach effect by the reproduction display of the moving image in which the delay has occurred can be improved, and the occurrence of a defect can be prevented by an appropriate effect without discomfort. ..

In the control example shown in FIG. 30, when the execution of the reach effect in which the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed is started, the video output by the reproduction display of the moving image may be faded in. For example, when starting the reproduction display of the delayed moving image, the blending rate of the moving image may be initially set to "0" and updated so as to increase the blending rate with the passage of time. By fading in the video output of the delayed moving image reproduction display in this way, it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort in the display effect using the moving image when the reproduction display of the moving image is delayed.

FIG. 31 shows an execution example of the notice effect YA1. When the advance notice execution timing is reached, for example, the advance notice effect YA1 is executed by the voice output of the voice of "It's intense heat!" Shown in FIG. 31 (A1) from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, when the advance notice execution timing is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A2), the advance notice effect YA1 is executed according to the lighting mode for lighting the effect lighting accessory 90. Alternatively, when the notice execution timing is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A3), the notice effect is produced by operating (advancing) the effect movable members 32A and 32B by the driving force of the movable member drive motors 33A and 33B. YA1 is executed. The notice effect YA1 may be an effect that can be performed by any one of the voice output, the lighting mode, the operation of the movable member, or a combination of a part or all of them.

As shown in FIG. 31B, it may be determined whether or not the advance notice effect YA1 is executed as the presence or absence of the advance notice effect at different ratios according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. In this case, for example, in step S202 of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect YA1 at a different ratio according to the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 31 (B). decide. In the example shown in FIG. 31B, the advance notice effect YA1 can be executed at a predetermined ratio in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 and the case of the fluctuation pattern PA3-3. As shown in FIG. 5, the variable pattern PA2-3 is in the reach state corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “missing”. Later, the normal reach effect, the super A reach effect, and the super B reach effect can be executed in order, which is a variable pattern. The variation pattern PA3-3 is a variation pattern capable of executing the same reach effect as the variation pattern PA2-3 after the reach state is reached in response to the case where the variable display result is a “big hit”. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 31B is set so that the rate at which the advance notice effect YA1 is executed is higher in the case of the variation pattern PA3-3 than in the case of the variation pattern PA2-3. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit", the advance notice effect YA1 is more likely to be executed than when the variable display result is "missing". In addition, the reach effect of Super B executed in response to the variation pattern PA2-3 and the variation pattern PA3-3 has a higher rate of the variable display result being a "big hit" than when the normal reach effect is executed. It is a reach production of Naru Super Reach. The advance notice effect YA1 may be executed before the reach effect of the supermarket B is started, in response to the start of the reach effect of the supermarket A by, for example, the reproduction display of the moving image. When the notice effect YA1 is executed, it can be announced that the reach effect of Super B will be executed corresponding to the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 or the fluctuation pattern PA3-3, so that the variable display result is "big hit". It is possible to dramatically increase the player's expectation for becoming.

It is not limited to those in which whether or not to execute the advance notice effect YA1 is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern, and the effect mode of the advance notice effect YA1 may be determined at different rates according to the variation pattern. In this case, depending on the production mode of the notice effect YA1, the expectation that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state, or the expectation that a specific effect such as the reach effect of the super B is executed is determined. Can be different. Further, if the reach variation pattern corresponds to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach", the variable display result depends on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" regardless of the variation pattern. It may be decided whether or not to execute the notice effect YA1 at a different rate, and the effect mode of the notice effect YA1 is changed at a different rate depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". It may be decided.

The advance notice effect YA1 may be executed based on the detection result of the operation by the player who presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period, as in the case of the post-reach effect AR1. In this case, the promotion notification for prompting the player's action may be executed, or for example, even if the promotion notification is not executed during the display stop period in which the playback display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped. Good. When the promotion notification is not executed, the operation by the player who presses the push button 31B may be detected, and the advance notice effect YA1 may be executed based on the detection result.

The notice effect period in which the notice effect YA1 is executed may include the entire display stop period in which the reproduction display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, or may include a part of the display stop period. Alternatively, the display stop period may include the entire notice effect period, or the display stop period may include a part of the notice effect period. In this way, the notice effect period and the display stop period may be controlled so that the notice effect YA can be executed if at least a part of each other overlaps, even if it is the display stop period. ..

FIG. 32 is a timing diagram showing a control example when the notice effect YA1 is executed. FIG. 32A shows a control example of moving image reproduction in the case where there is no delay in reading the moving image data and there is no reading delay. FIG. 32B shows a control example of moving image reproduction in the case where there is a read delay in which the read of the moving image data is delayed. FIG. 32C shows a control example for executing the notice effect YA1. The timing at which the moving image playback shown in FIG. 32 (A) is changed from "none" to "yes" is the playback start setting timing specified by the display control data included in the effect control execution data constituting the effect control pattern. Yes, it is the timing set as the start of playback of the moving image at the design stage.

For example, there is no read delay as shown in FIG. 32 (A) where there is no delay in reading the moving image data, or there is a read delay where there is a delay in reading the moving image data as shown in FIG. 32 (B). Regardless of the case, the advance notice effect YA1 is executed by reaching the advance notice execution timing before the reach is established in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, as shown in FIG. 32 (C). Is started. After that, the advance notice effect YA1 is executed until the advance notice effect period ends across the playback start setting timing. When there is a read delay shown in FIG. 32 (B), although there is a delay in starting the reproduction of the moving image, the moving image reproduction is started before the advance notice effect period ends. In this case, the advance notice effect period in which the advance notice effect YA1 is executed includes the entire display stop period in which the reproduction display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped. The advance notice effect YA1 uses the effect control execution data and the like that constitute the effect control pattern determined in response to the advance notice effect pattern, and has an audio output, a lighting mode, and a movable member regardless of whether or not the display is stopped. It is performed by any of the actions of, or a combination of some or all of them.

For example, when the display stop period is prolonged, the notice effect period in which the notice effect YA1 is executed may end before the end of the display stop period. Alternatively, the advance notice effect period in which the advance notice effect YA1 is executed may be started after the playback start setting timing. In this case, the advance notice execution period may be started after the display suspension period is started and before the display suspension period ends. In addition, if the display suspension period is prolonged, the advance notice execution period may end before the display suspension period ends. In this way, regardless of the context of the advance notice effect period in which the advance notice effect YA1 is executed and the display stop period, the advance notice effect YA1 uses the effect control execution data constituting the effect control pattern. By controlling the execution, it is sufficient that the execution can be performed within a predetermined advance notice effect period.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of. For example, among the features shown in the above-described embodiment, any one of the features for preventing the occurrence of defects, the feature for appropriately protecting the stored data, the feature for performing an appropriate effect, or the feature Anything may have features that combine at least a part of these.

In the above embodiment, as the moving image data, as shown in FIG. 14A, video is used by using data configured by multiplexing compression-encoded video data and audio data in a predetermined container format. It has been described that the display control of the image display device 5 and the output control of the effect sound in the speakers 8L and 8R are executed in synchronization so as to reproduce the moving image in which the output and the audio output are synchronized. On the other hand, for example, by setting the effect control execution data that constitutes the effect control pattern stored in the ROM 132, the display control of the image display device 5 and the output control of the effect sound in the speakers 8L and 8R are performed in the reproduction of the moving image. May be executed synchronously. In this case, when reading the image data or audio data stored in the effect data memory 123, if a delay caused in reading one of the stored data is detected, the progress of control using the other stored data is performed. The display control and the output control of the effect sound may be executed in synchronization with each other on standby.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game, for example, a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information, and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result. A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or credits) for one game, and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each. One game ends when the display results of (for example, multiple reels, etc.) are derived and displayed, and prizes are awarded according to the display results (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.). Is a game machine that can generate. In such a slot machine, the pachinko game shown in the above-described embodiment is achieved by the cooperation of hardware resources including a game control microcomputer for performing game control and software that performs predetermined processing. It suffices that it is configured to have all or a part of the features of the machine 1.

In addition, the device configuration and various operations of the game machine can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants. Slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the game value, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using game balls as the game value and credits as the game value. It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. The game executed in the game machine may be any game, at least may be controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or may be given a game value advantageous to the player. There may be.

As described above, in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present application, the WDT clear setting during reading is performed in step S281 of the controlling effect data transfer process shown in FIG. 11, which causes an inappropriate CPU 131. Since resetting can be suppressed, the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

In the controlled memory inspection process shown in FIG. 10, based on the determination that the memory inspection interval has elapsed in step S252, the memory inspection is executed by the control in step S257, and if the data transfer condition is satisfied. Since the alternative process of transferring the stored data in the bad area to the alternative area can be executed, the protection process for protecting the stored data can be appropriately executed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 20, even during the display stop period in which the reproduction display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, the start winning notification SH1 can be executed, so that the effect can be appropriately executed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 23, since the post-reach effect AR1 can be executed even during the display stop period in which the playback display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, the effect related to the detection of the motion by the player is appropriately executed. it can.

In the control example shown in FIG. 23, since the post-reach effect AR1 can be executed even during the display stop period in which the playback display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, the effect related to the effect movable members 32A and 32B can be appropriately performed. Can be executed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 27, the error notification EH1 can be executed even during the display stop period in which the playback display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, so that the effect related to the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality can be appropriately executed.

In the control example shown in FIG. 30, since the advance notice effect YA1 can be executed even during the display stop period in which the reproduction display of the moving image is not started and the display is stopped, the effect related to the advance notice can be appropriately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, since the storage area of the effect data memory 123 includes a data area that serves as a normal use area and a redundant area that serves as an alternative use area, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects and store data. The protection process to protect the data can be properly executed.

In step S455 of the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 12, since the control is performed to transfer the stored data of the defective block, which is the defective area of the data area, to the alternative area, which is the alternative area of the redundant area, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect. In addition, protection processing for protecting the stored data can be appropriately executed.

In step S271 of the controlled effect data transfer process shown in FIG. 11, it is determined whether or not the effect data stored in the effect data memory 123 is being read, so that the occurrence of a defect can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the moving image data is composed of video data related to display control and audio data related to output control of production sound multiplexed as a series of data, and output of display control and production sound. Since it can be executed in synchronization with the control, the effect can be executed appropriately.

In the control examples shown in FIGS. 20, 23, 27 and 30, control such as playback display of a delayed moving image can be executed in a period before the display result of the variable display is derived, such as a shaking display period. Therefore, the production can be performed appropriately.

In the controlled effect data transfer process shown in FIG. 11, when the number of clears during reading reaches the clear upper limit determination value in step S280, the clearing of the watchdog timer 134 by the setting in step S281 is restricted, so that there is a problem. Occurrence can be prevented.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) and a storage means (for example, an effect data memory 123) capable of storing data related to display control. ), A display control means (for example, CPU131, VDP135, etc.) capable of reading the stored data of the storage means and controlling the display means, and a signal generation means (for example, a signal generating means for generating a time elapsed signal when the measurement time elapses. The display control means includes, for example, a watch dog timer 134), and the display control means initializes the measurement time by the signal generation means before the monitoring time elapses. (Control by S273, etc.) and when a predetermined event in which the first control is not executed occurs during the reading period in which the stored data of the storage means is being read, the signal generation means is performed before the monitoring time elapses. It is possible to execute a second control (for example, control by step S281 of the effect data transfer process during control) that initializes the measurement time according to the above, and at least the first background and the first background and the first background when the variable display is executed. Including two backgrounds, in the first background, the first background music (for example, music A) is output from the beginning each time the variable display is executed once, and in the second background, the variable display is performed a plurality of times. The second background music (for example, music B) can be output, and in the second background, a predetermined sound can be output when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 57B).

According to such a configuration, the occurrence of a defect can be prevented. Further, even in a state where the music is output over a plurality of variable displays, the start timing of the variable display can be easily recognized, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the game machine, the display control means may be used to control the display of the first background and the second background and the display control of the variable display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in controlling the display of the background and the variable display.

Further, as an example of the form of a gaming machine capable of preventing the occurrence of a defect and allowing the second control means to operate suitably, a variable display is performed, and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled by a state), and includes at least a first background and a second background as backgrounds when executing variable display. In the first background, the variable display is Each time it is executed, the first background music (for example, music A) is output from the beginning, and in the second background, the second background music (for example, music B) is output over a plurality of variable displays. In the second background, a gaming machine capable of outputting a predetermined sound when the variable display is started (for example, FIG. 57B) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in another form, and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 33, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols.

A symbol number corresponding to each of the plurality of types of special symbols is assigned. As an example, each of the numbers indicating "0" to "9" is assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number of "10". Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

Both the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are formed in a square shape, for example. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), and the types may be the same. It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99", respectively. ..

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. In the display area of the image display device 905, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game are supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 905 are displayed. , The final decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to display identification information such as a decorative symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , Characters and other symbols, or decorative images showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed so as to flow from top to bottom in order from the one with the smallest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number, and when the decorative symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the process continues. The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number to display the symbol. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

A start winning memory display area 905H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold storage display (hold display) for identifiablely displaying the hold number of the variable display (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is performed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done. The hold memory display in the start winning memory display area 905H is generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening, or the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening. The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be different depending on whether it is generated based on the starting prize by passing (entering).

In the display area of the image display device 905, a changing special figure display area 905I is provided on the left side of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the changing special figure display area 905I, an image corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed. The display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is also referred to as a running display, an active display, a variable display compatible display, or the like. The running display and the hold storage display are also collectively referred to as a specific display. During the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening, the special figure display area 905I during the change is executed in a round shape. The medium display is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening, the variable symbol display area 905I is rounded. The running display is displayed. That is, when the first or second start condition is satisfied, the display removed from the start winning memory display area 905H is shifted to the special figure display area 905I during the fluctuation and displayed. Even if the display of the changing special symbol display area 905I allows the player to grasp whether the special symbol game is being executed by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Good. The size and shape of the hold storage display and the running display may be different.

In the example shown in FIG. 33, along with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display device 9025A and a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold display 9025A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The first special figure reservation memory number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reservation memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as a total hold memory number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of them (for example, It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball device 906B, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the normally open state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 906B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 34. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 34. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 34, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) Make it easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 34. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15 or 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 33, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also called "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, ordinary winning ball device 906A, ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be instructed by a player holding the operation stick of the stick controller 9031A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pushing and pulling the trigger button with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

An inclination direction sensor unit for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. A pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 901, the normal symbol display 9020 executes variable display of the normal symbol, such that a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 9041 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display 9020 is based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, the previous normal symbol game is completed after the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. The game of pachinko is started.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, after the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 34, for example. The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied because the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 34. Later, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, when the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. The final confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result) that is the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be "missing".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit as a specific game state (advantageous state, specific state) in which a round (also called "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. It is controlled by the game state. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, the special symbols common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The large winning opening is opened during the period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or the period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opened the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the large winning opening, so that the special variable winning ball device The 907 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the rounds may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won a prize in the big winning opening). ..

Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are the normal open round jackpot symbols, and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. Normal open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game In the jackpot game state as a specific game state (normal open jackpot state), which is controlled after the jackpot symbol is derived, the jackpot of the special variable winning ball device 907 The door opens the large winning opening during the period until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, elapses, or the period until the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. By doing so, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. The normally open jackpot state is also referred to as the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the jackpot symbol is derived In the jackpot game state as a specific game state (short-term open jackpot state), the special variable winning ball device 907 is used in each round. The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state, which is advantageous for the player, (the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normally open jackpot state. .1 second). In the short-term open jackpot state, the opening period of the big winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open jackpot state. Alternatively, in the short-term open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the number of second rounds (for example, "2") less than the number of first rounds (for example, "15") in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open jackpot state, if a game ball wins in the big winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15 or 10) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot game state in which no balls (prize balls) can be obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as the second specific game state.

Further, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to the one in which the opening period of the big prize opening is shorter than that of the big hit game state as the normal open round specific game state, for example, the opening of the big prize opening. The period (upper limit time) is the same for the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, while in the short-term open round specific game state, the maximum number of times (for example, 2 times) to open the large winning opening is It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period for changing the big prize opening to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. It suffices to be at least one of a short second period and a second round in which the number of rounds executed is less than the number of the first round in the normally open round specific game state. ..

After the special symbol indicating the number "2", which is the small hit symbol, is derived as the definite special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hit game state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 907 to change the large winning opening to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player, as in the short-term open big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A , Of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special figure game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach state.

Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while forming all or part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of a moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are brought into the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. Then, when a super reach reach mode such as super reach α or super reach β appears, the variable display result may be a “big hit” as compared with the case where a normal reach reach mode appears (big hit expectation). Will be higher.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "sliding" and "pseudo-ream" can be executed. Whether or not the variable display effect of "sliding" or "pseudo-ream" is executed may be determined in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 9011 side. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the variable display effect of "slip" is executed on the effect control board 9012 side regardless of the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example,). After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas (905L, 905R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the temporarily stopped displayed decorative symbol display areas is displayed. ”) Decorative symbol display area (for example, either one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 905L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 905R), and then the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after being changed again. , An effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the variable display effect of "slip", a predetermined number of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. By executing the variable display of the decorative symbol again, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state. is there.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the variable display is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the "left", "middle", and "right" before the resulting finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the effect display in which the decorative symbol is changed again (pseudo-continuous fluctuation) can be performed a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. This is the number of times the decorative pattern revariates in all areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances. The decorative symbols constituting the above are temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result. After that, pseudo-continuous variation (revariable display) is performed. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation (re-variation) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern was started two to four times in a row. It should be noted that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be executed up to a number of times more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

In addition to "sliding" and "pseudo-ream", for example, "development chance eyes", "development chance eyes end", and "slip after chance eyes stop" are examples of variable display effects that utilize the variable display operation of such decorative patterns. Various production operations such as, may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", "left", "middle", and "right" are used from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols that make up the development chance eye included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. As a predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are raised.

In addition, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye in all Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", which changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative pattern changes again in a part of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "slip" or "pseudo-ream", for example, a predetermined effect image can be displayed, an image display as a message, a voice output, or a lamp can be displayed. There is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state or the reach effect by super reach may be executed due to an effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol such as lighting. In some cases, a notice effect is executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a "big hit". The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead advance notice). The look-ahead notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the special figure game before starting the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced. is there. In particular, the pre-reading notice effect that continuously announces the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed multiple times in response to multiple special figure games is a continuous advance notice effect. Also called.

In this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, a stop symbol notice is executed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed in a plurality of variable displays prior to the execution of the variable display of the notice target. It has become so. In this embodiment, the predetermined combination of decorative patterns is a combination of reach loss. The player can recognize that the combination of reach loss is continuously derived and displayed, so that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the later variable display.

As a look-ahead notice effect, the hold memory display that displays the number of special figure hold memories in the start winning prize memory display area 905H so as to be identifiable is changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode, so that the variable display that is the target of the notice is displayed. In, a hold display notice that announces the possibility of becoming a "big hit" may be executed. For example, a hold display notice for displaying the hold memory display in the start winning memory display area 905H in a special mode different from the normal display mode may be executed at a predetermined timing.

In addition to the start winning prize memory display area 905H, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed in the changing special figure display area 905I. In this embodiment, the hold storage display removed from the start winning memory display area 905H in response to the hold being exhausted is shifted to the special figure display area 905I during this change. , When the hold storage display is performed in the starting prize memory display area 905H in a special mode and the shift is made to the changing special figure display area 905I, the running display in the changing special figure display area 905I is also a special mode. You may try to do it. By doing so, even when the pre-reading notice effect is executed at the stage where the number of reserved memories is small, the chance of changing the display mode to the special mode can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in this embodiment, apart from such a look-ahead notice effect, when the variable display is executed, the variable display result is regarded as a "big hit" based on the variable display variation pattern and the variable display result. A notice effect is being executed during the change in which the possibility of becoming is announced. The variable notice effect may be any one that announces the possibility of becoming a "big hit" by displaying the effect image, outputting the sound, lighting the lamp, operating the effect character, and combining them.

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "3" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. Of the multiple types of jackpot combinations, a predetermined normal jackpot combination (“non-probability variation jackpot combination”) after the predetermined reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed in response to the reach state. ”) Is stopped and displayed. For the fixed decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905 is "1". ~ Of the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols having even-numbered "2", "4", "6", and "8" is "left", "middle", and "right". It suffices that the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the above are all displayed on a predetermined effective line and stopped. Decorative symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the normal jackpot combination are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are called ordinary symbols (also referred to as "non-probability variation symbols").

Corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a normal jackpot symbol, the confirmed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed. The variable display mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "non-probability variation" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 901 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the executed state) is performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. In response to the reach state, after the same reach effect as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is executed, or without the reach effect being executed, a combination of multiple types of jackpots Of these, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. The definite decorative symbol that is the probability variation jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905 is "1". ~ Of the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" is "left", "middle", and "right". It suffices that the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the above are all displayed on a predetermined effective line and stopped. Decorative symbols having odd-numbered "1", "3", "5", and "7" symbol numbers constituting the probabilistic jackpot combination are referred to as probabilistic symbols. When the probabilistic jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed ornamental symbol, which is usually a jackpot combination, may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

Regardless of whether the fixed decoration symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmation special symbol in the special symbol game has a variable display result of "big hit". It is also called a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "probability change" in the case. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be terminated when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the control is performed again in the big hit game state is satisfied. As with the time saving control, the probability variation control may be terminated when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, even if the probability change control is terminated when the "probability change fall" decision to end the probability change control is made in the probability change fall lottery that is executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state ends. Good.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal", and control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per normal". The second is to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a normal state or a low base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control is also called a high probability high base state. A probabilistic state in which only probabilistic control is performed and time reduction control or high open control is not performed is also called a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control is sometimes referred to as a "probability change state", and is sometimes referred to as a time reduction probability change state in order to distinguish it from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, the probability change state (high probability low base state) in which only the probability change control is performed and the time reduction control or the high opening control is not performed may be a probability change state without time reduction in order to distinguish it from the high probability high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without the probability change control is also called the low probability high base state. The normal state in which the probability variation control, the time reduction control, and the high opening control are not performed is also called a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that the special figure game can be executed frequently and that the variable display result in each special figure game becomes a "big hit". Is increased, which is advantageous for the player. A gaming state that is advantageous for a player different from the jackpot gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state (special state).

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may not be in the reach state, and any combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, the fixed decoration symbol (the fixed decoration symbol that becomes the chance eye corresponding to the short-term open round jackpot state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a short-term open round jackpot symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "sudden probability" (also referred to as "sudden big hit" or "sudden change big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "sudden probability", it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, and after the end, the probability change control may be performed together with the time saving control.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the game is controlled to the small hit game state. After that, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result becomes "small hit". However, if the number of times the special figure game is executed in the special game state reaches a predetermined number when the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and become the normal state.

If the big winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbol that constitutes the opening chance eye is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". Based on this, there are cases where the short-term open big hit state is controlled and cases where the variable display result is controlled to the small hit game state based on the "small hit". On the other hand, as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, the big winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbol constituting the reach combination is derived and displayed because the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". Based on this, it is only when the short-term open jackpot state is controlled. Therefore, while the definite decorative symbol constituting the opening chance eye can be controlled to either the short-term open jackpot state or the small hit game state, the definite decorative symbol of the reach combination is in the short-term open jackpot state. It corresponds to being controlled by.

A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that are usually a big hit combination in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905, for example, "left". , "Middle", and "Right", in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the same decorative symbol is changed again with the same decorative symbol aligned, and the decorative symbol (probability variation symbol) that becomes a probability variation jackpot combination and the normal jackpot One of the decorative symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed (final stop display) as a fixed decorative symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", as the re-lottery effect, the definite decorative symbol that becomes a normal jackpot combination after the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is re-variated. The re-lottery defeat effect is performed to derive and display. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "probability change", as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probability change jackpot combination after the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is re-variated. The re-lottery winning effect of stopping and displaying the symbol may be executed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be executed.

After the definite decorative symbol, which is usually a jackpot combination, is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds is completed in the jackpot game state, while the round is being executed at the start of the jackpot game state or in the jackpot game state. During the jackpot game state, which is the probabilistic notification effect of whether or not to control the probabilistic state during the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game in the jackpot game state. A promotion effect may be performed. It should be noted that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect that is executed after the final round is finished is sometimes called "ending promotion effect" in particular.

The jackpot medium promotion production includes a jackpot medium promotion success production that notifies that there is a promotion in which the game state is in a probable change state even though the final decoration symbol is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that is in a probable change state. There is a promotion failure production during the big hit to notify. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, and either the normal symbol or the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. It is sufficient to notify the player so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion in the probable change state by displaying different effect images.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 34. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function.

On the main board 9011, for example, from a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. And various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the electric component for the effect such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 produces effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909 and the like. It is equipped with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined effect operation to be performed on the electric component for use.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives it.

As shown in FIG. 34, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 is connected to the main board 9011. The gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. Anything that has it will do. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold display 9025A, a second hold display 9025B, and a normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It includes lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

FIG. 35A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 35 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 35 (A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" and the variable display result are "big hit". ”, Different EXT data are set according to the decision result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability change" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is set as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the normal open big hit state and the short-term open big hit state. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , The first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on this, it is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable display in the start winning prize storage display area 905H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number in the start winning prize storage display area 905H or the like so as to be identifiable. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. The second hold memory number notification command is used when, for example, a second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command correspond to the start of execution of the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be sent.

The first hold storage number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the number of hold storages of the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start winning. Further, the second hold storage number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure hold storage number when the second start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize.

In this embodiment, a first start opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command for designating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has been won is transmitted as the reserved storage information. At the same time, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. When the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages specified to indicate that the number of reserved storages of the first special figure or the second special figure has increased (the first designated command to add the number of reserved memories or the second) While sending the hold storage number addition designation command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicating that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. (1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" as a winning judgment result, and a judgment result of the big hit type. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) as to which determination value range the random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern type falls within as the determination result at the time of winning. ..

In this embodiment, in the prize-winning random value determination process (see FIG. 46), whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" or a "small hit" based on the occurrence of the starting prize. Whether or not, the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3'for determining the type of fluctuation pattern are determined in which determination value range. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, a value that specifies that the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" or a value that specifies the big hit type is set, and the effect control board 9012 is set. Controls transmission. In addition, a value that specifies a range of determination values including a random number value MR3'as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control board 9012. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the big hit type. In addition to being recognizable, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern type is included in the determination value in a predetermined range based on the value set in the variation category command.

As an example of the symbol designation command, when the command C400H is the first symbol designation command according to the case where the variable display result is "missing", and the command C401H is the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability change". The command C402H is set as the second symbol specification command according to the above, and the command C402H is set as the third symbol designation command according to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probability change". The command C404H is set as the fourth symbol designation command according to the case where the big hit type is "probability", and the command C404H is set as the fifth symbol designation command according to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / output port) 90105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 90103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 9011. As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 9011, the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern type. Numerical data indicating each of MR3', a random number value MR4' for determining a fluctuation pattern, and a random number value MR5'for determining a general map display result are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 90104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random numbers MR1'to MR5'. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. 40, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value MR1'. Numerical data indicating a part of ~ MR5'may be counted.

The random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game to the big hit game state as a "big hit", and the variable display result as a "small hit". It is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the winning game state, and takes a value in the range of, for example, "1" to "65535". The random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is "big hit", as "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". It is a random value used for this purpose, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3'for determining the variable pattern type is a random number value used for determining the variable pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of prepared types, for example, "1". It takes a value in the range of "251". The random number value MR4'for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to "1". It takes a value in the range of "997". The random number value MR5'for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random value used, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 37 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern") and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The big hit fluctuation pattern and the small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit".

Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 37 may be included in at least one variation pattern type among a plurality of predetermined variation pattern types. Each variation pattern type may be configured to include a single or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, the mode of the effect operation executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

As an example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are classified (grouped) according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state and a variation accompanied by normal reach are included. It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a pattern and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β). Further, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach may be classified into different fluctuation pattern types according to the content of the reach effect (for example, whether it is super reach α or super reach β). Alternatively, it may be classified into different variation pattern types depending on whether or not a predetermined variable display effect is executed. As another example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the variable display time of the decorative symbol or the like. Among the plurality of fluctuation pattern types, there may be one that includes a common fluctuation pattern.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 34 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. .. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 37. Table data and the like that make up the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

FIG. 38 shows a configuration example of a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 38 (A) and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 38 (B) are used. , Prepared in advance. The first special symbol display result determination table 90130A shows the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" is based on the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referenced to determine. The second special symbol display result determination table 90130B shows the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" is based on the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referenced to determine.

In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, the special figure display is performed according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1'for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the disorder for determining the special figure display result is disturbed depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1'is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the decision data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probabilistic state, compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied. The special figure display result is determined in the case where the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability change Frequent small hit game states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state such as a state (high accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B as well, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". May be good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 90130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, even if the ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state is lower in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability change state than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probability change state without time reduction. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table.

FIG. 39 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. The jackpot type determination table 90131 determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to do. In the jackpot type determination table 90131, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", "probability variation", "probability", etc. It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 90131, the assignment of the determination value for the jackpot type of "probability" is different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (the value in the range of "83" to "100") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while the variable special figure is assigned. When is the second special figure, a determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type "probably" can be different. In particular, in a special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state. Therefore, for example, the high-opening control accompanying the time-saving control is used to control the normally variable winning ball device. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the 906B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". Good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" as compared with the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

Further, the ROM 90101 determines the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the special figure display result, the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4'for determining the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination table and the like referred to for this purpose are stored.

The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 34 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 90102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 90102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 90 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 40, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. There is. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 40 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 90151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 90151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 90151C, a game control flag setting unit 90152, and a game. It includes a control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 ′ for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 ′ for determining a fluctuation pattern type extracted from a random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment. Etc. are set as pending data, and are stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B is still started although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. Stores the reserved data of no special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 ′ for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 ′ for determining a variation pattern type extracted from a random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the establishment. Etc. are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

The hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 90151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 90151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passage gate 9041, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR5'for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit 90154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 90103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

For example, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154 stores numerical data indicating random values MR2'to MR5' as random count values, and periodically or irregularly depending on the execution of software by the CPU 90103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 34 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 34, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124 and the I / O 90125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation for the effect control CPU 90120 to receive input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via I / O 90125, and effect control CPU 90120 for I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O90125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 9013. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A and a game for the push button 9031B A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

In the effect control board 9012, for example, a random number circuit 90124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 34 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 90121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, an effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the effect control pattern table may store the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, the advance notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

The effect control pattern at the time of special symbol fluctuation corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is in the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the definite special symbol which is the special symbol display result. , It is composed of data showing the control contents of various effects such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. Has been done. The advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents and the like corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The special figure variation time effect control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each variation pattern for executing the reach effect.

FIG. 41 (A) shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, an effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations, and it is sufficient that the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in chronological order. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of motion control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. Therefore, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 9011, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to a predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data showing the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data showing the output mode of the sound effect linked to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. There is. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. The lamp control data includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitting body, such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes data indicating a period for effectively detecting an operation on an operation unit such as an operation button 9030, a control content of an effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 41 (B) is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, control is performed to output voice from the speakers 908L and 908R in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 or a decorative LED in a mode specified by the lamp control data. Is performed, and the operation for the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is received and the effect content is determined during the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect component that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 41 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is in the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the advance notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period during which the round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period during which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). The effect control pattern may be provided.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern (special figure variation effect control pattern) based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of a decorative pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (preliminary effect control pattern), for example, when starting execution of the advance notice effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the corresponding effect control pattern may be configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the read position of the stored data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 has the effect device (image display device 905, speaker 908L, 908R, game) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Control of light emitters such as effect lamps 909 and decorative LEDs, movable members included in production models, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, and the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n indicate the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of the effect control. Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data # n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the voice control board 9013, and the like. In the display control unit 90123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM to develop the image data. Further, in the voice control board 9013 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. ..

The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 34 has an effect control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. 42 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 42A includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 90191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 42B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. The start winning command receiver 90194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total number of reserved storages. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category command , And a set of four commands called a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. A storage area is secured in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and hold storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the start winning from the beginning in the free area of the start winning command buffer 90194A. At the time of starting winning, commands are transmitted in the order of starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8". It will be stored in the order of category command and hold storage number notification command. In FIG. 42B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “6”.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 42 (B) is the first storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer number "1") every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is deleted from what is stored in, and the subsequent stored contents are shifted. For example, when a new variable display of a decorative symbol is started in the stored state shown in FIG. 42 (B), each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted and corresponds to the buffer number “2”. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers "3" to "6" is the buffer number. It is shifted to the area corresponding to "2" to "5".

Of the start winning command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 42 (B), for the area corresponding to the buffer number “6”, an example is shown in which the command cannot be received normally and the hold storage number notification command is missed. Has been done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 42 (B), the content in the fourth storage area where the hold storage number notification command should be originally stored is "0000 (H)" corresponding to the buffer number "6". It remains.

Whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the start winning command (start opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number notification command) stored in the start winning command buffer 90194A. Or, the look-ahead notice pattern when executing is determined. At this time, if the commands at the time of starting prize are missed or inconsistent, the look-ahead notice effect is not set until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Limited to. When the command at the time of starting prize is received during the period when the setting of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted (during the read-ahead notice restriction), the pre-reading notice effect is not set at the reception timing. The determination information is set to "1" (or on state). In addition, when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted, even if the look-ahead notice effect for the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurs within the predetermined period is not executed in all aspects of the look-ahead notice effect. Alternatively, the look-ahead advance notice effect of some aspects may not be executed.

In the start winning command receive command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 42 (B), each buffer number (hold number) is associated with a "hold display mode" indicating a display mode of the hold storage display. When the value of this "hold display mode" is "0", it is a normal display mode, and when it is "1" or "2", it indicates that it is a special mode different from the normal display mode. For example, it is a special mode when the pre-reading notice effect of the notice display notice is executed.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in this embodiment will be described.

In the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 90102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 is output (step). S9013).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1'to MR5' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the display device 904B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening on the special variable winning ball device 907 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 9020 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and is movable in the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It enables the tilting motion setting of the wing piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect control corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 9012, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off from. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9015 shown in FIG. 43 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90101 of FIG. 44 as the start winning determination process.

In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 45, the CPU 90103 first, based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A, first. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 9022A is ON (step S90201). At this time, if the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading, for example, the first reserved stored number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved stored number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154. When the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 is set to "1" (step S90202). Step S90203).

When the first start port switch 9022A is turned off in step S90201 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 906B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 9022B is on ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S90205). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 is set to "2" (step S90205). Step S90206).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90203 and S90206, the number of special figure reserved storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S90207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S90208). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S90208, the CPU 90103 uses the random number MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determination and the random number value MR3' for determining the variation pattern type is extracted (step S90209). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1'to MR3' is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A, while the start port buffer value is "2". Occasionally, numerical data indicating random values MR1'to MR3' is set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1'for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2' for determining the big hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". Furthermore, it is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is "big hit". The random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol belongs. By executing the process of step S90209, the CPU 90103 obtains numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time. Extract.

Following the process of step S90210, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S90211). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. Make settings to send the first start port winning designation command to 9012. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 9012 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, by executing the command control process in step S9017 shown in FIG. 43 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step S9021, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step S90212). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 90101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step S90213). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9017 shown in FIG. 43 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step S90213, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S90214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step S90214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90215), and then step S90204. Proceed to the process of. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step S90214; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90216). Start The winning prize determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90212 of FIG. 45 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as a "big hit" or a "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type that abstractly classifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, and the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 90103 executes the winning random number value determination process in step S90212 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1'is determined to derive and display the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol as the special symbol display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Judgment as to whether or not it is performed. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, the special symbol display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit", and the decoration It is pre-read that the variable display mode of the symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by the effect control CPU 90120 or the like on the effect control board 9012 side. be able to.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 90103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152, for example, to confirm the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The gaming state is specified (step S90401). The CPU 90103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the process of step S90401, the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data for determining the special figure display result to be used for determining the special figure display result corresponding to the game state is selected (step S90402). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S90209 of FIG. 45 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S90403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of step S90402 are set, and the CPU 90103 sets the random number value MR1'. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1'by comparing each determined value one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 90103 sets the random number value MR1'and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1'is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparing. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1'is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1'is determined as "big hit" (big hit start). Judgment) Yes.

If it is determined in step S9403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S90403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S9403; No). Step S90404). The CPU 90103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of step S90402. Therefore, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1'is within the range of the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S90404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S90404; No), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result becomes "missing" is issued to the effect control board 9012. Make settings for transmission (step S90405). As an example, the CPU 90103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "00H".

Following the process of step S90405, the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value for loss is set according to the presence or absence of the time saving control in the current gaming state specified by the process of step S90401 (step S90406). The fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value specifies the range of the determination value including the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and is determined in any of a plurality of types of fluctuation categories preset according to the fluctuation pattern type and the like. It is a judgment value set to judge whether or not to be performed. In this embodiment, when at least the variable display result is "missing", the variable category ("non-reach") is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the presence or absence of time reduction control and the total number of reserved memories. Variable category of "common"), variable category that has a variable display mode of "super reach" regardless of the presence or absence of time reduction control and the total number of stored memories (variable category of "common to super reach"), and other "losses" (Variation category of "Other Loss") is provided. Then, based on the random number value MR3', it is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined.

If it is determined in step S90404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S90404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is issued to the effect control board 9012. The setting for transmission is performed (step S90407). As an example, the CPU 90103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "04H". Following the process of step S90407, the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value for small hits is set (step S90408). For example, in the process of step S90408, "251" is set as the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value for small hits. Here, "251" is the maximum value in the random value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random value MR3'is always equal to or less than the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value for small hits. That is, it is determined that only one variable category is provided according to the case where the variable display result is "small hit", and the variable category is determined.

If it is determined in step S90403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S9403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type (step S90409). At this time, the CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , The jackpot type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table 90131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. A setting is made for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90409 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90410). As an example, when it is determined in step S90409 that the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variation", the EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to "01H", and when it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability variation". If it is determined that the EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to "02H" and the jackpot type is determined to be "probable", set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designation command to "03H". Just do it. Following the process of step S90410, the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value according to the determination result of the process of step S90409 is set (step S90411).

After executing any of the processes of steps S90406, S90408, and S9041, the fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value set in each process and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern type are used. , The variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3'is determined (step S90412).

By the processing of steps S90406, S90408, and S9041, instead of setting a predetermined fluctuation pattern type determination threshold value, one of the fluctuation pattern type determination tables is set, and any fluctuation pattern type is set as the fluctuation category. It may be determined whether or not the determination is made. After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category command according to the determination result by the process of step S90412 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90413), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 46, even if the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", the fluctuation is uniformly within the range of the determined value including the random value MR3'for determining the pattern type. I am trying to judge the category. On the other hand, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit", the determination of the variable category may not be performed. In this case, a symbol specification command corresponding to the variable display result being "big hit" or "small hit" is transmitted, and the variable pattern type is used when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". You may want to send a variable category command that comprehensively indicates that.

In the start winning prize determination process shown in FIG. 45 and the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 46, the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 46 is executed in step S90212 after the process of step S90211 in FIG. 45 is executed. As a result, the processing of steps S90405, S90407, S90410, and S90413 in FIG. 46 is executed, and the processing of step S90214 in FIG. 45 is further executed. After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S9017 shown in FIG. 43, the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first starting condition. Or when the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, hold storage number notification command (first hold) Four commands (memory number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt. Note that the command is not limited to those that are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S9017 for each timer interrupt.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 of FIG. 44, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152. And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 90151A and the second special symbol reservation storage unit 90151B. The display device 904B determines whether or not to start the special figure game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special symbol display result. , Determine (predetermine) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the definite special symbol (big hit symbol or) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. In this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). ). Therefore, in the special symbol normal processing, when the execution condition of the special figure game using the first special figure and the execution condition of the special figure game using the second special figure are satisfied (the first special figure hold memory). (When the reserved data is stored in the unit 90151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B), control for preferentially satisfying the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. On the other hand, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion). Say).

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, numerical data indicating a random number value MR3'for determining the fluctuation pattern type is used based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Based on the process of determining the variation pattern type to one of multiple types and the determination result of the variation pattern type, the variation pattern is determined to be one of multiple types using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4'for determining the variation pattern. Processing to be done is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 and the variation pattern setting process in step S90111 determine a variation pattern including a variable display time of a definite special symbol, a special symbol, and a decorative symbol, which is a variable display result of the special symbol. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the fluctuation pattern setting processing include a random number value MR1'for determining the special symbol display result, a random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, a random number value MR3'for determining the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination. It includes a process of determining a variable display mode of a special symbol or a decorative symbol by using the random value MR4'of.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are used to make settings for changing the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. For example, each time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 90153, is subtracted or added by 1, and the first step is made. 1 By a common timer regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display device 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The elapsed time is measured. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing in step S90112 includes the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. It suffices if the processing is such that the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special diagram game using the diagram is controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set the settings. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Will be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the variable display result being "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening is performed. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is open may be set according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for keeping the big prize opening open is set to "29 seconds", and the big prize is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open jackpot state. On the other hand, the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is set to "0.1 seconds" corresponding to the big hit type "probability", and the number of opening of the big winning opening which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-term open jackpot state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door. ..

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, and the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening have been reached. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending a jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of large winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of large winning opening openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting period corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of making various settings for starting probability variation control and time saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for keeping the big winning opening open is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". By setting "0.1 seconds" and setting the number of times the large winning opening is opened to "15 times", the small hit game state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening door may be executed.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed by the effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, and the game effect lamp 909. It includes processing that waits until it elapses. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described.

When the effect control board 9012 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 47 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 9012. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 9012 side, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but interrupts when using a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 90125, a control signal that becomes an effect control command is transmitted from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S9072 (step S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9073), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading thereof. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued production control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in step S9074, the effect control process process is executed (step S9075). In the effect control process process of step S9075, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices such as the drive operation in the effect model, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the effect control process process in step S9075, the effect random number update process is executed (step S9076), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193 as various random number values used for the effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S9072.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9075 of FIG. 47 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 90120 first displays a specific display for displaying a hold display or an executing display (specific display) in the start winning memory display area 905H or the changing special figure display area 905I. The process is executed (step S90161). In the specific display process, a process for executing the hold display notice may be performed.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a stop symbol notice setting process for executing the stop symbol notice as a look-ahead notice effect (step S90162).

After executing the process of step S90162, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Select and execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 based on whether or not the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command from the main board 9011 is received. Includes processing to determine.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. In order to perform variable display of the above and other various effect operations, it includes processing for determining a fixed decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to a variation pattern of a special symbol and a type of display result.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192, and displays the decorative symbol. Performs various effect controls during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to the above, the fixed decorative symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is displayed. When the elapse has passed, the variable display result can be determined by autonomously deriving and displaying the finalized decorative symbol on the side of the effect control board 9012 without using the effect control command from the main board 9011. When the final decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6" corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot. Update to. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. The game effect lamp 909 is output by the speaker 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. And various effect controls in the small hit game state such as turning on / off / blinking the decorative LED. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 9011. ..

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. The game effect lamp 909 is output by the speaker 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the decorative LED. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The jackpot effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 905. The speaker 908L and 908R output the sound and sound effect by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and the game effect lamp 909 and decoration are output by the command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls in the jackpot game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the LED for, are executed. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 9011.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. , Output voice and sound effect from speakers 908L and 908R by outputting command (sound effect signal) to voice control board 9013, and game effect lamp 909 and decoration by outputting command (illumination signal) to lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the LED, are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90162 of FIG. 48 as the stop symbol advance notice setting process. In the stop symbol advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a start prize has been generated due to a game ball entering the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening ( Step S90701). In the process of step S90701, it is determined whether or not a start winning prize has occurred by determining whether or not a starting opening winning designation command such as a first starting opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command has been received. Just do it.

When it is determined that the start winning prize has occurred (step S90701; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol notice is already being executed (step S90702). Whether or not the stop symbol advance notice is being executed may be determined, for example, by whether or not the stop symbol advance notice executing flag is in the ON state. The stop symbol notice executing flag is set to the on state when the stop symbol notice is started, and is reset to the off state when the stop symbol notice is finished.

If the stop symbol notice is not being executed (step S90702; No), it is determined whether or not the base state is low (step S90703). Whether or not it is in the low base state may be specified from the game state specification command.

In the case of the low base state (step S90703; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is 3 or more (step S90704). When it is in the high base state (step S90704; No), it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is 3 or more (step S90705). The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number may be specified from the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command.

When it is determined that no new start winning prize has occurred (step S90701; No), when the stop symbol notice is already being executed (step S90702; Yes), the first hold storage number is less than 3 in the low base state. (Step S90704; No), when the second reserved storage number is less than 3 in the high base state (step S90705; No), it is assumed that the execution condition of the stop symbol advance notice is not satisfied, and the stop symbol advance notice setting process is performed. To finish. It should be noted that the stop symbol notice may be executed regardless of the case where the number of reserved memories is less than 3 or the game state. Further, it may be decided whether or not to execute the stop symbol advance notice, for example, when the previous variable display ends, without taking the start prize as an opportunity. That is, the execution condition of the stop symbol advance notice setting process is not limited to that of this embodiment.

When the first hold storage number is 3 or more in the low base state (step S90704; Yes), or when the second hold storage number is 3 or more in the high base state (step S90705; Yes), the start winning prize this time. It is determined whether or not the variable display result includes the hold memory that becomes a “big hit” or the super reach loss before the hold memory (notice target) corresponding to (step S90706). The variable display result of the hold storage may be determined based on the symbol designation command or the variable category command.

If the variable display result is a "big hit" or contains a hold memory that causes a super reach loss (step S90706; Yes), the super reach is set in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the stop symbol notice. Since the target of the notice becomes unclear due to the execution or the big hit, the stop symbol will not be announced. Therefore, the stop symbol notice setting process is terminated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the stop symbol notice even when the hold memory which is the normal reach loss is included in addition to the hold memory which is the non-reach loss before the hold memory which is the notice target. .. By doing so, it is possible to secure the execution frequency of the stop symbol notice. When the stop symbol advance notice is executed in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage that is non-reach loss, the combination of reach loss is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol contrary to the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 9011 side. .. Therefore, the non-reach fluctuation pattern in FIG. 37 is not strictly a non-reach fluctuation pattern, but is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determination to be non-reach on the main board 9011 side.

In this embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation patterns that cause normal reach loss are provided (see FIG. 37), but at least a part of the fluctuation patterns that cause normal reach loss (for example, the one with the longer fluctuation time). When PA2-2) is included in the hold memory, the stop symbol notice may not be executed, or at least a part of the change patterns that cause a super reach loss is included in the hold memory. However, the stop symbol notice may be made feasible. Further, as in this embodiment, the stop symbol notice can be executed even if the hold memory corresponding to at least a part of the change patterns that is reach loss before the hold memory to be notified is included. Alternatively, if the hold memory that is the reach loss is included before the hold memory to be notified, the stop symbol notice may not be executed. Further, the stop symbol notice may be executed regardless of the hold storage content prior to the hold memory to be notified.

If the variable display result is a "big hit" or does not include a hold memory that is a super reach loss (step S90706; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice for the start winning prize that has occurred this time. (Step S90707).

In the process of step S90707, the variable display result and the variable category (variable pattern) are pre-read based on the symbol designation command and the variable category command received together with the start opening winning designation command at the time of the start winning, and the determination ratio shown in FIG. Then, it suffices to decide whether or not to execute the hold display notice.

As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, it is determined to execute the stop symbol notice at a rate of 95% when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability change" (probability change big hit). , It is decided to execute the stop symbol notice at a rate of 40% in the case of super reach loss. As described above, it can be said that the stop symbol notice of this embodiment is a notice effect for notifying that it will be a probable change jackpot. On the other hand, even in the case of other jackpot types, the stop symbol notice may be executed.

If the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change" (non-probable change big hit), when the stop symbol notice is executed, the combination of reach loss by the probable change symbol and the stop are performed as the stop symbol notice. , Makes the player feel as if the reach by the probabilistic pattern has fallen into a non-probable change jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the notice target is a non-probability change jackpot, it is desirable that only the combination of reach loss due to the non-probability change symbol is stopped in the stop symbol notice.

In step S90707, when it is determined whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the stop symbol notice (step S90708), and when it is determined not to execute (step S90708; No). , Ends the stop symbol notice setting process.

When it is determined to execute the stop symbol notice (step S90708; Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (step S90709).

When it is determined that the probabilistic state is determined (step S90709; Yes), the stop symbol (stop symbol notice pattern) of reach loss due to the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the combination of the decorative symbols to be stopped (stop symbol) in the stop symbol notice (stop symbol notice pattern). Step S90710).

When it is determined that the state is not in the probabilistic state (non-probability change state) (step S90709; No), the stop symbol (stop symbol notice pattern) of reach loss due to the probabilistic change symbol or the non-probability change symbol is used as the stop symbol in the stop symbol notice. Determine (step S90711).

Subsequently, the determination results in steps S90707, S90710, and S90711 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S90712), and the stop symbol advance notice setting process is completed.

In this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice is executed, as shown in FIG. 51, any of the stop symbols forming the reach loss is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 51, in this embodiment, as the stop symbol pattern (stop symbol notice pattern), any of "1" to "8" in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. Patterns (stop symbol patterns A to H) are prepared in which the decorative symbols are aligned and the numbers are shifted by one in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C. The stop symbol (medium stop symbol) in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C may be any symbol (excluding big hits). Further, the middle stop symbol may be a dedicated symbol (for example, a notice symbol other than a number). In the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the notice of the stop symbol notice, the combination of reach loss is continuously stopped and displayed, so that the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled.

As shown in FIG. 51, when the game state is in the probabilistic state, it becomes one of the stop symbol notice patterns of reach loss by the non-probability change symbol, and when the game state is the non-probability change state, it becomes the non-probability change symbol or the probabilistic change state. Stopping reach loss by symbol One of the symbol notice patterns. As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of the probabilistic state, by displaying the reach by the non-probability change symbol, the player is made to feel once that the probabilistic change state ends as a non-probability change jackpot. After that, it becomes a reach loss and the notice of the stop symbol is started. Therefore, it is possible to execute a stop symbol notice that pretends to be a non-probable change jackpot, further arouse the expectation of the player, and improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice is executed, the same stop symbol (reach loss) is continuously stopped and displayed. That is, in the process of step S90710 or S90711 of FIG. 49, one of the stop symbol notice patterns shown in FIG. 51 is determined, and the stop symbols corresponding to the stop symbol notice pattern are continuously stopped in the variable display up to the notice target. It is supposed to be displayed. By doing so, the same stop symbols are consecutive, so that the player can easily recognize that the stop symbol notice is being executed.

On the other hand, the symbols to be stopped may be determined in the continuously variable display until the notice is applied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 55, the stop symbol (for example, any of the stop symbol notices A to H in FIG. 51) to be stopped in the variable display a plurality of times (three times in FIG. 55) is patterned in advance. , The pattern to be stopped may be determined in a plurality of variable displays by selecting the pattern.

The stop symbol notice pattern of stop symbol notice B → B → B in FIG. 55 indicates that the stop symbol of “212” is a stop symbol notice pattern in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the three variable displays. Stop symbol notice The stop symbol notice pattern of B → D → F is a stop symbol notice pattern in which the stop symbols of “212”, “434”, and “656” are sequentially stopped and displayed in three variable displays. Shown. The stop symbol notice pattern of stop symbol notice D → D → D indicates that the stop symbol of “434” is a stop symbol notice pattern in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed in the three variable displays. Stop symbol notice The stop symbol notice pattern of D → F → H is a stop symbol notice pattern in which the stop symbols of “434”, “656”, and “878” are sequentially stopped and displayed in three variable displays. Shown. Although some stop symbol notice patterns are shown here for explanation, a pattern in which the reach loss of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed, a stop symbol notice pattern when the stop symbol notice is executed in two variable displays, etc. May be prepared as appropriate. In this way, by patterning the stop symbols that are stopped and displayed in a plurality of variable displays that execute the stop symbol notice, the processing load in the determination process can be reduced, and the appearance rate of each symbol can be easily adjusted. ..

In this case, as shown in FIG. 55, when the same reach loss stop symbols are continuous, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than when they are not continuous. Further, even if the middle stop symbols are different, the reliability may be increased when the reach with the same left and right symbols is continuous. In this case, the reliability may be different depending on whether or not the middle stop symbol is the same. By doing so, when the stop symbol notice is started, the player pays attention to whether the same symbol is stopped and displayed, and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, when deciding each symbol to be stopped in the continuous variable display until it becomes the target of advance notice, it is in a series of stop symbol advance notices that the stop symbol of the non-probable variable symbol is determined (or made easy to determine) in the probabilistic state. It may be only the first stop symbol. In this way, by making at least the first stop symbol reach by the non-probability variation symbol after the stop symbol notice is started, the player is made to recognize that the non-probability variation jackpot ends and the probability variation state ends. be able to.

Normally, whether or not the reach loss is stopped and displayed is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern on the main board 9011 side, but in this embodiment, when it is determined that the stop symbol notice is executed. Is designed to stop and display the reach loss stop symbol on the effect control board 9012 side regardless of the fluctuation pattern.

In this way, when the stop symbol of reach loss is stopped and displayed on the side of the effect control board 9012, that is, when the stop symbol notice is executed, the stop symbol notice is given depending on the mode at which the stop symbol is stopped. It is preferable that the player can recognize. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), as compared with the case where the normal reach loss is specified by the fluctuation pattern, the stop symbol of the reach loss is stopped when the stop symbol notice is executed and the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss is executed. When displaying, the fluctuation period (reach fanning period) from the establishment of the reach to the final stop may be shortened. In addition to or instead of shortening the fluctuation period from the establishment of reach to the final stop, if a stop sound is output when the decorative symbol is finally stopped, the stop sound may be different or dedicated. You may use effects. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stop sound in the case of normal reach loss specified by the fluctuation pattern is set as the stop sound A, and the stop sound is set as the stop sound B in the case of the reach loss when executing the stop symbol notice. May be. Further, the difference between the left and right symbols (reach symbol) and the middle stop symbol at the time of reach loss may be different depending on whether or not the stop symbol is announced. For example, in the case of reach loss that does not execute the stop symbol notice, the symbol in the range of "-2" to "+2" is stopped and displayed in "middle" as compared with the left and right symbols, while the stop symbol notice is given. May, as shown in FIG. 51, only the symbol of "-1" may be stopped and displayed in "middle" as compared with the left and right symbols. Further, the stop display may be displayed only when the stop symbol notice is given (for example, "+3", "-3", etc.).

Further, even in the case of the same normal reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), when the stop symbol notice is executed, after the reach is established as compared with the case where the stop symbol notice is not executed. The variable period (reach fanning period) until the final stop may be shortened in the same manner as when the stop symbol notice is executed with non-reach loss. In this case, since the period other than the reach fanning period becomes long, other effects may be executed during that period. For example, an effect suggesting that the stop symbol notice is executed may be executed during the entire symbol variation period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), when the stop symbol notice is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss, when the symbol constituting the reach is a probabilistic symbol, the reach is higher than that in the case of the non-reach variable symbol. The fluctuation period (reach fanning period) from the establishment to the final suspension may be lengthened. By doing so, even if the stop symbol is announced, the period during which the player can expect to be a probabilistic jackpot can be extended, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the reach fanning period may be the same regardless of whether the symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probabilistic symbol.

Although the case of executing the stop symbol notice in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern is not shown, the stop symbol notice is given with the probability variation symbol for the entire symbol change period (the period until the left symbol stops) and the period until the right symbol stops. When it is executed, or when the stop symbol notice is executed with a non-probability variation symbol, it may be the same as or different from either of them. If the left stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol, the stop symbol notice is executed with the probabilistic symbol, and if the left stop symbol is the non-probable symbol, the stop symbol notice is executed with the non-probable symbol. It may be the same as the case of. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being informed of the presence or absence of the stop symbol notice depending on the period until the left symbol is stopped and the period until the right symbol is stopped.

Further, FIG. 52 shows an example in which the reach fanning period is shorter when the stop symbol notice is executed than when it is not executed, but when the stop symbol notice is executed, the reach fanning period is shorter than when it is not executed. The period may be longer.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol determination process for determining the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) executed in step S90171 in the effect control process process of FIG. 48. In the stop symbol determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the stop symbol advance notice is being executed (step S90721). Whether or not the stop symbol advance notice is being executed may be determined, for example, by whether or not the stop symbol advance notice executing flag is in the ON state.

When the stop symbol advance notice is being executed (step S90721; Yes), the final stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol advance notice pattern determined in step S90710 or S90711 of the stop symbol advance notice setting process is set to be stopped and displayed. (Step S9072), the stop symbol determination process is terminated.

When the stop symbol notice is not being executed (step S90721; No), a process for determining the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display result is executed. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice is not being executed (step S90721; No), it is determined whether or not the change is the target of the stop symbol notice notice (step S90723).

When it is a change of the notice target of the stop symbol notice (step S90723; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (step S90724).

When the variable display result is a big hit (step S90724; Yes), the big hit symbol (big hit combination) is determined based on the stop symbol notice pattern to be announced (step S90725). After that, the stop symbol determination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the notice target, when the reach is reached with the decorative symbol having the same number as the stop symbol notice, the reliability of the big hit is high. Therefore, in step S90725, as shown in FIG. 54, the ratio of the jackpot symbol determined to be the same as the reach symbol of the stop symbol notice is high. Moreover, it is easy to determine not only the left and right reach symbols but also the same jackpot symbol as the middle symbol in the stop symbol.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stop symbol (reach symbol) in the stop symbol notice and which symbol is to reach in the variable display of the notice target, and the interest of the game is improved.

The determination ratio shown in FIG. 54 is an example, and in the variable display of the notice target, when the reach is reached with the decorative symbol having the same number as the stop symbol notice, the reliability of the big hit may be high.

In this embodiment, when the stop symbol notice is executed, the same reach loss symbol is stopped and displayed up to the variable display of the notice target, but when a different reach loss symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the notice target, the notice is given. In the variable display of the target, when the reach is reached with at least a part of the reach loss symbols that are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher as the number of times the stop display is displayed in the stop symbol notice is higher.

If the change is not the target of the notice of the stop symbol (step S90723; No), the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display result is determined (step S90726). In step S90726, a combination of non-reach loss, a combination of reach loss, a combination of probable change jackpot, and a combination of non-probability change jackpot may be determined according to the variable display result.

Further, even if the change is subject to the notice of the stop symbol notice, if the variable display result is not a big hit (step S90724; No), the final stop symbol corresponding to the variable display result (reach loss in this case) is determined (step S90726). .. In this case, it may be determined to be one of the decorative symbols "1" to "8" at a predetermined ratio (for example, an equal ratio), but if the decorative symbol with the same number as the stop symbol notice reaches the reach, it is a big hit. The reach symbol may be determined at a rate that increases the reliability. That is, it may be difficult to select the reach symbol having the same number as the stop symbol notice. In this way, in the case of fluctuations in the notice target of the stop symbol notice, if the reach is reached with the decorative symbol of the same number as the stop symbol notice according to the variable display result of the notice target, the reliability that becomes a big hit The final stop symbol may be determined so as to be higher.

After executing the process of step S90725 or S90726, the stop symbol determination process ends.

In this embodiment, the number of effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in the image display device 905 is one, but FIG. 56 (A). ), There may be a plurality of effective lines (3 lines in total) including at least the central line SC, the diagonal line WA, and the WB. Further, there may be effective lines (total of 5 lines) of the upper line and the lower line.

In this case, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", the decorative symbols indicating the numbers "1" to "8" and the blank symbols other than the numbers (for example, "" * ", Etc.) and are arranged alternately and scrolled. Each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R is composed of three display areas, so that three decorative symbols and three blank symbols indicating numbers are displayed. It has become. Then, on the central line SC, the diagonal line WA, and the WB, when the decorative symbols showing the same numbers are aligned and stopped and displayed, a big hit is obtained. It should be noted that the blank symbols do not form a jackpot combination, and even if the blank symbols are aligned, they will be lost. There may be a blank symbol at some chance.

When there are three such effective lines, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), it is possible to generate a double reach (W reach) in which two types of symbols reach at the same time in the diagonal lines WA and WB. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (B), if the decorative symbol of "1" or "2" stops in the middle of each decorative symbol display area 905C of "middle", a big hit is obtained. Therefore, the central line SC It is possible to perform a reach effect that makes it appear as if it is more likely to be a big hit than a single reach (single reach) displayed in the above.

The present invention can be applied even when there are a plurality of such effective lines. When there are a plurality of such effective lines, in the stop symbol notice, the symbols (stop symbol notices I to P) that are the reach loss of W reach as shown in FIG. 56 (C) may be stopped and displayed. is there. When executing the stop symbol notice (steps S90710 and S90711 in FIG. 49), it may be determined to be any stop symbol notice pattern including the stop symbol notices A to H in the above-described embodiment.

Then, in the variable display of the notice target, when the reach is reached by at least the decorative symbol included in the reach loss displayed in the stop symbol notice, it is sufficient that the reliability of the big hit is high. Specifically, when a symbol that is the reach loss of the stop symbol notice W reach is stopped and displayed, and when one or both of the W reach are matched in the variable display of the notice target, the jackpot reliability Should be high.

In addition, when a stop symbol with a different reach loss is displayed during the execution of the stop symbol notice, if one or both of the W reach matches the stop symbol of the reach loss, the jackpot reliability is higher than when it does not continue. May be higher. If the stop symbol of reach loss in which both of the W reach match continues, the jackpot reliability may be higher than in the case where either one matches.

When there are three such effective lines, the jackpot symbols are those in which the numbers "1" to "8" are aligned with the central line SC, as well as diagonal lines WA and WB as shown in FIG. 56 (D). Includes items that are available. For example, those having "1" on the diagonal lines WA and WB are 1WA and 1WB, respectively, and those having "3" on the diagonal lines WA and WB are 3WA and 3WB, respectively.

When the jackpot symbol is determined in the variable display of the notice target for which the W reach stop symbol notice has been executed, in step S90725 of FIG. 53, for example, the final stop symbol (big hit symbol) is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 56 (E). ) Should be determined. At the determination ratio shown in FIG. 56, the jackpot reliability is higher when the reach is at least included in the W reach stop symbol notice than when it is not included, and the jackpot reliability is higher when the same W reach is achieved. The degree is set to be high.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the combination of the stop symbols in the stop symbol notice and which symbol is the reach in the variable display of the notice target, and the interest of the game is improved.

The determination ratio shown in FIG. 56 (E) is an example, and if the variable display of the notice target reaches with a decorative symbol having the same number as the stop symbol notice, the reliability of the big hit is high. Good.

<About changing voice>
Subsequently, the voice during fluctuation (during variable display) in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the player can select the changing background image from the first background and the second background. The color, the drawn character, and the like may be different between the first background and the second background. Then, different songs are reproduced and output during the fluctuation according to the selected background image. When the first background is selected, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the music A corresponding to the first background is repeatedly reproduced and output from the beginning every time the fluctuation is started. At the end of the fluctuation, the playback output of the music A also ends. On the other hand, when the second background is selected, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the second background is supported in the customer waiting demo and the initial variation in which the game is started from the end of the jackpot game state. The playback output of the music B is started. In the second background, the reproduction output of the music B is continued even if the fluctuation ends. When the reproduction output of the data of the series of music B is completed, the music B is reproduced and output from the beginning. That is, in the case of the second background, the music B is played back in a loop without stopping. The initial fluctuation may be only when the game is started from the customer waiting demo.

Then, in this embodiment, except for the initial fluctuation, when the fluctuation is started in the second background, a fluctuation start sound indicating that the fluctuation is started is output. The fluctuation start sound may be any sound indicating that the fluctuation is started.

As described above, in this embodiment, different background images can be displayed on the first background and the second background, and different audio output controls are executed, so that the effect is various. Then, in the second background in which the music B loops over a plurality of fluctuations, a fluctuation start sound indicating that the fluctuation is started is output, so that even when the music is played over a plurality of fluctuations. , It becomes easier for the player to grasp the fluctuation start timing.

Even in the second background, in the initial fluctuation, the playback output of the music B is started from the state of no sound or the music is not reproduced and output, so that it is easy for the player to grasp the start of the fluctuation, so the fluctuation starts. No sound is output. By doing so, it is possible to output a fluctuation start sound as needed. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation start sound may be output even if it is the first fluctuation. In such a case, the output control of the fluctuation start sound becomes easy.

As shown in FIG. 57, a common stop sound is output at the end of the fluctuation (when the fluctuation is stopped) regardless of the background. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand the end timing of the fluctuation regardless of the background or the music to be played and output. In the background A, since the reproduction of the music is interrupted when the fluctuation is stopped, the stop sound may not be output. Further, in the background B, since the fluctuation start sound is mainly produced by the start of the next fluctuation shortly after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop sound may not be output. The stop sound may not be the main force in the backgrounds A and B.

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to output a plurality of types of fluctuation start sounds in the second background. In this embodiment, a start sound A and a start sound B are provided as fluctuation start sounds. The start sound A and the start sound B may be different sounds. The frequency with which the start sound A is output is high, and the start sound B is rarely output. By providing a plurality of types of fluctuation start sounds in this way, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous.

In this embodiment, the first background and the second background can be switched between each other by performing a predetermined operation on the operating means such as the stick controller 9031A during the fluctuation. If there is a background switching operation while the music A is being output on the first background, the music is switched to the second background and the output music is changed to the music B. The same is true in the opposite case. When the variation is executed, the music A and the music B are reproduced on the voice control board 9013 regardless of whether the background is the first background or the second background. Then, the corresponding music is output depending on which background is used. Therefore, when the background is switched during the fluctuation, the music being played is output. That is, even when the music A is output, the music B is being played behind the scenes, and even when the music B is being output, the music A is being played behind the scenes. By doing so, even if the background is changed during the fluctuation, the corresponding music can be output immediately. Note that the reproduction here means converting the music data into outputable audio, and does not include the output part.

The sound described here is reproduced by the sound control board 9013 under the control of the effect control board 9012, and is output from the speakers 908L and 908R.

The voice control board 9013 is provided with a plurality of playback channels for reproducing the voice (directing sound) of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Then, a reproduction channel is assigned according to the type of audio. For example, sounds that are output at the same time are reproduced by different playback channels and are superimposed and output. Further, although the music A and the music B are played on different playback channels, one of them is output according to the background image. Specifically, in the case of the first background, the music A is output from the speakers 908L and 908R at a predetermined volume. In the case of the second background, the music B is output from the speakers 908L and 908R at a predetermined volume. Then, the music that is not output (does not correspond to the background) is reproduced on the reproduction channel, but is controlled so as not to be output from the speakers 908L and 908R by controlling the volume to zero or the like.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation start sound setting process for setting the variation start sound executed in step S90171 in the effect control process process of FIG. 48. In the fluctuation start sound setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the present is the second background (step S90741). Whether the current background is the first background or the second background may be determined by, for example, a background flag provided in the RAM. When the background is set as the first background, the value of "1" is set in the background flag, and when the background is set as the second background, the value of "2" is set in the background flag.

When the current background is the first background (step S90741; No), the fluctuation start sound is not output, so the fluctuation start sound setting process ends.

When the current background is the second background (step S90741; Yes), the start sound determination of which fluctuation start sound is to be output is performed (step S90742). In step S90742, the fluctuation start sound is set to the start sound A or the start sound B, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 59, depending on whether the display result is “big hit”, super reach, or the like. It may be determined whether or not. In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 59, the start sound A is generally determined, and the start sound B is a rare fluctuation start sound. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 59 is an example and is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined that the start sound B is set with a low probability regardless of the display result.

When the start sound A is determined in step S90742 (step S90743; Yes), the setting for outputting the start sound A at the start of fluctuation is made (step S90744), and the fluctuation start sound setting process is ended.

When the start sound B is determined in step S90742 (step S90743; No), the setting for outputting the start sound B at the start of fluctuation is made (step S90745), and the fluctuation start sound setting process is completed.

It should be noted that the jackpot reliability and the super reach ratio may differ depending on which of the fluctuation start sounds is. For example, when the start sound B is output, the jackpot or super reach may be more likely to occur than when the start sound A is output. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation start timing by the fluctuation start sound and to suggest to the player whether or not it will be a big hit. Then, since the player pays attention to the type of the fluctuation start sound, the interest of the game is improved.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of a voice reproduction process for reproducing the changing sound executed in step S90172 in the effect control process process of FIG. 48. The sound reproduction process shown in FIG. 60 is obtained by extracting a portion for outputting the sound according to the present invention, and in step S90172, a process for outputting another effect sound or the like is also executed. In the audio reproduction process shown in FIG. 60, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (step S90781). Which timing is in the fluctuation may be determined from the timer value and the effect control pattern in the effect control process timer.

When it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (step S90781; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the first fluctuation from the customer waiting demo or the end of the jackpot game state (silence state) (step S90782).

When it is determined that the variation is the first time (step S90782; Yes), the control for starting the reproduction of the music B corresponding to the second background is executed (step S90783).

When it is determined that the fluctuation is not the initial variation (step S90782; No), or after the processing of step S90783 is executed, it is determined whether or not the background is the first background (step S90784).

When it is determined that the background is the first background (step S90784; Yes), the control for starting the reproduction of the music A corresponding to the first background is executed (step S90785). After that, the audio reproduction process is terminated.

When it is determined that it is not the first background (the second background) (step S90784; No), it is determined whether or not it is the first variation from the customer waiting demo or the end of the jackpot game state (silence state) (step S90786). ).

When it is determined that the fluctuation is not the first fluctuation (step S90786; No), the control for outputting the fluctuation start sound set in step S90744 or S90745 of FIG. 58 is executed (step S90787), and the audio reproduction process is terminated. .. If it is determined that the variation is the first time (step S90786; Yes), the audio reproduction process is terminated.

When it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (step S90781; No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation is stopped (step S90788). It should be noted that the fluctuation stop time here indicates the output timing of the stop sound, and does not have to be exactly the same as the end timing. Unless the fluctuation is stopped (step S90788; No), the audio reproduction process is terminated.

If the fluctuation is stopped (step S90788; Yes), the control for outputting the stop sound is executed (step S90789), and the audio reproduction process is terminated. As shown in FIG. 52, when a plurality of types of stop sounds are output, in step S90789, control for outputting the corresponding stop sounds is executed according to the presence or absence of the stop symbol notice. Just do it.

In this embodiment, as described above, the player can select the changing background image from the first background and the second background. Specifically, the player can change the background image at an arbitrary timing during the fluctuation by executing a predetermined operation with the stick controller 9031A or the like during the fluctuation.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a background switching process for switching the background image executed in step S90172 in the effect control process process of FIG. 48. In the background switching process shown in FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not a predetermined background switching operation has been detected (step S90761). In step S90761, for example, it may be determined whether or not a predetermined operation signal has been input from the controller sensor unit 9035A. If the background switching operation is not detected (step S90761; No), the background switching process ends.

When the background switching operation is detected (step S90761; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current background is the first background (step S90762). The current background image may be determined from the background flag.

When it is determined that the current background is the first background (step S90762; Yes), control for changing to the second background is performed (step S90763). In step S90763, the process of switching the background flag is also executed. Then, the reproduction channel for outputting the music is switched from the reproduction channel for the reproduction of the music A to the reproduction channel for the reproduction of the music B (step S90764), and the background switching process is completed.

When it is determined that the current background is the second background (step S90762; No), control for changing to the first background is performed (step S90765). In step S90765, the process of switching the background flag is also executed. Then, the reproduction channel for outputting the music is switched from the reproduction channel for the reproduction of the music B to the reproduction channel for the reproduction of the music A (step S90766), and the background switching process is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can change the background image at an arbitrary timing during the fluctuation regardless of the gaming state. That is, the same gaming state may occur in both the first background and the second background. By doing so, the production in each game state becomes various, and the interest of the game is improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, when it is determined to execute the stop symbol notice when the start winning is generated, the stop symbol (stop symbol notice pattern) in the stop symbol notice is determined in steps S90710 and S9071 of FIG. 49, and the final notice target is determined. The stop symbol was determined in step S90725 of FIG. 53 based on the stop symbol notice pattern to be notified when the variable display was started. Not limited to this, when it is decided to execute the stop symbol notice, the final stop symbol (big hit symbol, reach symbol) to be notified may be determined at the time of starting winning. In this case, a plurality of patterns in which the stop symbol in the stop symbol notice and the final stop symbol to be notified are predetermined are prepared, and by determining the pattern, the stop symbol in the stop symbol notice and the final stop symbol to be notified can be determined. You may decide.

In addition, when the stop symbol notice is being executed, it may be possible to display which symbol has reached the reach loss. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand the highly reliable reach pattern in the notice target.

In the above embodiment, when a non-probability change jackpot occurs in the probability change state, it is controlled to the non-probability change state (low probability high base state), but it may be controlled to the low probability low base state.

In the above-described embodiment, when the stop symbol notice is executed in the probabilistic state, the reach loss stop symbol due to the probabilistic symbol may not be obtained, but the reach loss stop symbol due to the probabilistic symbol may be used with a low probability. Even when the stop symbol notice is executed in the non-probability change state, the ratio of the stop symbol of the reach loss due to the non-probability change symbol may be increased.

In the above embodiment, the execution mode of the variable display is different between the case where the reach loss is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol notice and the case where the reach loss is stopped and displayed when the stop symbol notice is not executed. The execution mode of the variable display may be the same regardless of whether or not the variable display is performed. Further, when the stop symbol notice is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach loss, the variable display execution mode may be the same regardless of whether or not the stop symbol notice is given.

In addition, when a symbol having a specific reach loss (for example, reach loss of W reach) is stopped and displayed in the stop symbol notice, the jackpot reliability of the variable display of the notice target is higher than when the specific reach loss is not stopped and displayed. It may be made higher. By doing so, the player pays attention to the execution process of the stop symbol notice, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the above embodiment, the player can select the changing background image from the first background and the second background, but the selectable background image may be three or more types. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of music that can be played in each background.

In the above embodiment, the effect is diversified by providing the start sound A and the start sound B, which have different sounds, as the fluctuation start sound in the second background. The method of differently outputting the fluctuation start sound is not limited to this, and the type and volume of the sound may be different. Further, the output timing may be slightly shifted from the start of fluctuation to give the player a sense of discomfort. Further, different fluctuation start sounds may be provided in combination. Further, there may be three or more types of fluctuation start sounds.

Depending on the type of fluctuation start sound, the jackpot reliability and the expectation of super reach may be different. That is, the advance notice effect may be executed by the fluctuation start sound. By doing so, the player pays attention to the fluctuation start sound, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the background image can be switched by the operation of the player, but the background image may be automatically switched according to the variable display result or the variable pattern. In addition, a plurality of types of effect modes that are switched regardless of the game state or depending on the game state may be provided so that the background image is obtained according to the effect mode.

Next, a modified example in which a notification effect related to the number of game balls given by winning a game ball is executed during a round in a jackpot game state will be described. In this modification, the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the jackpot display result. Then, during the round in which the jackpot game is in progress, a notification effect related to the number of game balls given by winning the game ball is executed. Here, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the number of acquired game balls paid out to the winning game balls. In addition, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the occurrence of over-winning by changing the mode of notification when an over-winning occurs. As described above, the effect related to the number of game balls is an effect of giving some notification to the acquired game balls (number of game balls).

In addition, a plurality of types of notification effects related to the number of game balls are provided. For example, when the effect state is the first effect state, the notification effect is executed by the first notification mode, and when the effect state is the second effect state, the notification effect is executed by the second notification mode. That is, the notification effect is different depending on the effect state. The notification effect according to the first notification mode is executed based on the number of game media given during the round (during the big hit game state) reaching a predetermined number. Further, the notification effect according to the second notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media given during the round (during the big hit game state) is a specific number different from the predetermined number.

During the round (during the big hit game state), the number of game balls given is variably displayed each time the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 907. In addition, it is possible to select whether the effect state during the round (during the big hit game state) is the first effect state or the second effect state. In addition, the number of game balls acquired by over-winning is also taken into consideration in counting the number of game balls of the notification effect related to the number of game balls.

A specific example of the notification effect will be described below. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the notification effect. Here, in this modified example, the total number of game balls that can be acquired by one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for each winning ball, and the round continues until 10 winnings, so about 100 per round (10 x 10 =). You can get 100) game balls. If the jackpot continues, the value displayed in the previous total number of acquisitions will be inherited. FIG. 62 shows the case where the second and subsequent jackpots are executed.

FIG. 62A is a diagram showing a display screen of the image display device 905 in the first round during the jackpot game when the jackpot display result is obtained. In the first round, an effect that allows the effect state during the round to be selected from the two modes is executed. On the left side of the screen of the image display device 905, an A mode image 90211 by a girl character is displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, a B mode image 90212 by a boy character is displayed. The player selects one of the modes according to the mode selection image 90210 indicated by the left and right arrows prompting the player's selection operation. At the start of the round, the A mode image 90211 is selected as the initial value, and the left side of the mode selection image 90210 is selected. The fact that these images are selected can be known by blinking the images. It should be noted that the image of the selected one may be surrounded by a thick frame instead of blinking, and any mode may be used as long as it is known which mode is selected.

The player can select any mode during the period of one round. Such mode (effect state) switching can be changed by operating the stick controller 9031A left and right. The left and right selection may be changed by an operation means such as a cross key, or the mode may be switched by pressing the push button 9031B. Further, three or more types of effect modes may be provided, or the types of effect modes that can be selected may be increased for each number of big hits. Further, the mode selection period may be a round other than one round, and the selection operation may be performed only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) during the round. Further, a new effect mode may be set as an initial value (type of the mode selected first) for each big hit.

62 (b) to 62 (d) are explanatory views showing a display screen of the image display device 905 when the A mode is selected. Further, FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (g) are explanatory views showing a display screen of the image display device 905 when the B mode is selected. As shown in FIG. 62B, when the A mode is selected, the total number of game balls acquired by winning the large winning opening image 90205 is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 90205 increases every time the game ball wins a large prize opening. In FIG. 62B, it is shown that the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot is 2000. In addition, the first broadcast image 90204 is displayed in the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the large winning opening exceeds a multiple of 500. In FIG. 62 (b), when the number of game balls exceeds 2000, which is four times 500, the first broadcast image 90204 shows that 2000 game balls have been acquired. In addition, a girl image 90203 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. It should be noted that the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 90205 and the number displayed as the first broadcast image 90204 indicate the case where they are displayed at the same momentary timing. Further, when the total number of acquisitions is not a well-separated number (for example, when the total number of acquisitions is increased by 13), the number displayed in the total number of acquisition display image 90205 is different from the number displayed as the first notification image 90204 ( The number displayed in the acquired total number display image 90205 is 2013, the number displayed as the first notification image 90204 is 2000, etc.).

FIG. 62 (c) shows a display screen of the image display device 905 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same jackpot as in FIG. 62 (b) is 2500. As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the acquired total number display image 90205 shows that the acquired total number of game balls is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is five times 500, the first broadcast image 90204 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. Further, the girl image 90203 is displayed by a person different from that in FIG. 62 (b). Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the image display device 905 becomes as shown in FIG. 62 (d). In FIG. 62 (d), it is shown that the total number of acquired images 90205 is 5000. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is 10 times 500, the first broadcast image 90204 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Further, the girl image 90203 is displayed by a person different from that in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c). In this way, when the number of game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the girl image 90203 changes together with the first broadcast image 90204. Here, the first broadcast image 90204 and the girl image 90203 are continuously displayed until the next first broadcast image 90204 and the girl image 90203 are changed. However, the first broadcast image 90204 and the girl image 90203 may be deleted after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Next, the case where the B mode is selected in FIG. 62A will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (e), when the B mode is selected, the total number of game balls acquired by winning the large winning opening image 90215 is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 90215 increases every time the game ball wins a large prize opening. Here, the character display mode is different between the acquired total number display image 90215 in the B mode and the acquired total number display image 90205 in the A mode. In this way, the display of the total number of acquisitions is different depending on the effect mode, but the display of the total number of acquisitions may be the same regardless of the mode. In FIG. 62 (e), it is shown that the total number of game balls acquired in the jackpot is 2000. In addition, a boy image 90213 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In the B mode, such an effect by the boy image 90213 is executed. However, unlike the A mode, in the B mode, even if the total number of acquired game balls exceeds 2000, the effect of notifying the total number of acquired game balls in the center of the screen is not executed. In FIG. 62 (e), another effect image may be displayed without displaying the boy image 90213.

FIG. 62 (f) shows a display screen of the image display device 905 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same jackpot as in FIG. 62 (e) is 2500. As shown in FIG. 62 (f), the acquired total number display image 90215 shows that the acquired total number of game balls is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, the second notification image 90214 shows that 2500 game balls have been acquired. In the B mode, the second notification image 90214 is displayed in the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the winning opening exceeds a multiple of 2500. In FIG. 62 (f), when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is one times 2500, the second broadcast image 90214 shows that 2500 game balls have been acquired. The second broadcast image 90214 is erased after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds after being displayed).

Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the image display device 905 becomes as shown in FIG. 62 (g). In FIG. 62 (g), it is shown that the total number of acquired images 90215 is 5000. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is twice 2500, the second broadcast image 90214 shows that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Here, in the B mode, the boy image 90213 does not change the character as in the A mode, and an image of the same person is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the mode is controlled to the A mode, the first notification image 90204 executes the notification effect by acquiring the game ball. Further, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the second notification image 90214 executes the notification effect by acquiring the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) to 62 (d), every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the first notification image 90204 executes a notification effect by acquiring the game balls. Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (g), every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, the second notification image 90214 executes a notification effect due to the acquisition of the game balls. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

Further, as shown in the acquired total number display image 90205 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 90215 in the B mode in FIG. 62, the game given each time the game ball wins the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 907. A display is made in which the spheres increase by 10. Therefore, since the number of game balls given can be variably displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) by changing the display of the total number of acquisitions.

In addition, a mode selection image 90210 for selecting whether to set the A mode or the B mode during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in S9074 of FIG. 47. In particular, FIG. 63 describes various flags set when a game ball is won in the large winning opening. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not there is a receive command from the main board 9011 by checking the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer (S90511). ). If there is no reception command (N in S90511), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

On the other hand, when there is a reception command (Y in S90511), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the reception command is a big prize opening prize notification command by checking the MODE data of the reception command, for example. Judgment (S90512). When the effect control CPU 90120 is a large prize opening winning notification command (Y in S90512), the large winning opening winning number count, which is a stored value of the large winning opening winning number counter provided in the production control counter setting unit. The value is updated to be added by 1 (S90513). The grand prize opening winning count count value indicates the number of times a game ball has won a prize in the grand winning opening between the execution of a round and the execution of the next round. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the large winning opening winning flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit (S90514), and proceeds to the process of S90515. The big winning opening winning flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins in the big winning opening.

In S90515, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the over-winning is achieved. For example, the updated large winning opening winning count count value is a predetermined over-winning judgment value (a value one larger than the winning upper limit judgment value. In this modified example, the winning upper limit judgment value is "10", so the over-winning judgment It may be determined whether or not the value is "11"). If the effect control CPU 90120 does not win an over prize (N in S90515), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90120 is over-winning (Y in S90515), the over-winning flag is set (S90516), and the command analysis process is terminated. The over-winning flag is a flag that is set each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening when the winning upper limit determination value is exceeded.

In S90512, if the reception command is not the grand prize opening prize notification command (N in S90512), the effect control CPU 90120 makes a setting according to the reception command (S90517), and ends the command analysis process.

64 and 65 are flowcharts showing the processing during the round in the effect control process processing. In this modified example, in order to explain the jackpot effect process (S90176 in FIG. 48) in the effect control process process in more detail, the round process (for example, FIGS. 64 and 65) and the round post process (for example, FIG. 66) It is divided into ~ FIG. 68). The processing during the round and the processing after the round may be integrated to form a big hit production processing.

In the process during the round shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the designated command reception flag is set after the large winning opening is opened (S90920). Here, when the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the RAM 90122, the flag such as the designated command reception flag after opening the big winning opening is set by the effect control CPU 90120, and the big hit game ends. Is erased at the specified timing.

The effect control CPU 90120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (S90921) when the designated command reception flag is not set after the big winning opening is opened (N in S90920). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 executes control of the effect device (image display device 905, speaker 908, game effect lamp 909, etc.) according to the content of the process data n (display control execution data n) (S90922).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the start of the first round (S90923). Whether or not it is the first round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the designated command while the large winning opening is open. When the effect control CPU 90120 determines that it is the start of the first round (Y in S90923), the mode selection screen as shown in FIG. 62 (a) is displayed (S90924), and the process proceeds to S90925. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start of the first round (N in S90923), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S90928 without performing the processes of S90924 to S90926.

In S90925, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the selected mode is the A mode. When the selected mode is the A mode (Y in S90925), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the A mode flag (S90926), and proceeds to the process of S90928. On the other hand, when the selected mode is not the A mode (N in S90925), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the B mode flag (S90927) and shifts to the process of S90928. Here, if the player does not select a mode while displaying the mode selection screen, the A mode set as the initial value is selected.

Next, in S90928, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning flag is set. The big winning opening winning flag is a flag set in S90514 of FIG. 63, and is a flag set every time a game ball is won in the big winning opening. When the large winning opening winning flag is set (Y in S90928), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the large winning opening winning flag (S90929), and proceeds to the process of S90932. On the other hand, when the large winning opening winning flag is not set (N in S90928), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the over winning flag is set (S90930). The over-winning flag is a flag set in S90516 of FIG. 63, and is a flag set when an over-winning to the large winning opening occurs.

When the over-winning flag is set (Y in S90930), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the over-winning flag (S90931) and proceeds to the process of S90932. On the other hand, if the over-winning flag is not set (N in S90930), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the processing of S90940 without performing the processing of S90932 and S90933.

In S90932, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter, updates the total number of acquisitions display (total number of acquisitions display) according to the mode (S90933), and shifts to the process of S90940. In S90933, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (e), the game ball wins the grand prize opening in the total number of acquisition display image 90205 in the A mode and the total number of acquisition display image 90215 in the B mode. It will increase by 10 each time. It should be noted that the process of updating the display of the total number of acquisitions may be executed even when the game ball wins a prize in a winning opening other than the large winning opening during the round.

In S90940, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the A mode flag is set. When the A mode flag is set (Y in S90940), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S90941. On the other hand, when the A mode flag is not set (that is, when the B mode flag is set), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S90943 (N in S90940).

In S90941, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500 (Y in S90941), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the A mode (S90942), and shifts to the processing of S90945. To do. For example, the A mode display means that the first notification image 90204 and the girl image 90203 are displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) to 62 (d). It is a process (to change). The display in A mode is continuously displayed until the next display is updated. On the other hand, when the total number of acquired game balls does not exceed a multiple of 500 (N in S90941), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S90945 without performing the process of S90942.

In S90943, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500 (Y in S90943), the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the B mode (S90944), and proceeds to the process of S90945. To do. For example, the display of the B mode is a process of displaying the second broadcast image 90214 when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, as shown in FIGS. 62 (f) and 62 (g). Here, the display of the second broadcast image 90214 in the B mode is erased after a lapse of a predetermined time. For example, it is displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500 and is deleted 2 seconds later. The display of the second broadcast image 90214 may be erased at the timing when the executed round is completed. On the other hand, when the total number of acquired game balls does not exceed a multiple of 2500 (N in S90943), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S90945 without performing the process of S90944.

In S90945, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. When the process timer has timed out (Y in S90945), the effect control CPU 90120 starts the next process timer (S90946) and controls the effect device according to the contents of the next process data (S90947). , End the process during the round. On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (N in S90945), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing during the round without performing the processing of S90946 and S90947.

In S90920, the effect control CPU 90120 resets the designated command reception flag after opening the large winning opening (Y in S90920) when the designated command receiving flag is set after opening the large winning opening (S90934). Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects an interval effect (an effect that displays an interval according to the number of rounds), and selects process data according to the selected interval effect (S90935). Then, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer (S90936), sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-round process (S90806) (S90937), and ends the process during the round.

In the process of S9093 to S90932 in FIG. 64, after the process of adding the prize ball in the over prize is executed, the game ball wins a large prize in the total number of acquired images 90205 in the A mode and the total number of acquired images 90215 in the B mode. A variable display of the total number of acquisitions is performed, which increases by 10 each time a prize is won in the mouth. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls given by winning 11 or 12 game balls, which is more than 10 in one unit game, so that the player can be informed. Appropriate notification effect can be executed.

Note that FIG. 64 shows a case where the total number of acquired game balls is determined after determining whether or not the A mode flag is set in S90940. However, the image to be displayed is determined by first determining the total number of acquired game balls and confirming whether the mode is A mode or B mode when the determined value exceeds a predetermined number. You may do so.

[Second Modified Example] In the second modified example, a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by the notification effect executed when a specific number of winnings in the gaming medium exceeds a predetermined number will be described. For example, such a game machine is as follows.

(1) For example, in a game machine capable of playing a game, a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easy to win and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is difficult to win (for example). For example, a special variable winning ball device (large) that executes a notification effect in a game machine configured to be controlled to a probabilistic state based on a variable winning means that can be changed to a closed state (for example, a probabilistic jackpot). The variable winning means is set to the first state until at least one of the winning opening)) and the predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game media wins. Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a unit game (for example, a round) that can be changed is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). ), And the advantageous state control means has at least a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (for example, a second advantageous state) having a lower advantage than the first advantageous state. It can be controlled to a big hit game state based on a normal big hit), and a specific number (for example, the 11th or 12th) of the game media is more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the first advantageous state (for example). Based on the fact that an over-winning has occurred), it is possible to execute a notification effect in a special mode (for example, a notification effect in which the first large winning opening LED 9020a emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908). Similar to steps S903923 and S903924 in the effect control CPU 90120 in executing a notification effect in a game machine configured to be controlled to a probability change state based on a probable change jackpot. It is characterized by further including a part for executing processing. According to such a configuration, the game by the notification effect is performed by executing the notification effect in a special mode based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number more than the predetermined number in one unit game in the first advantageous state. You can improve your interest.

(2) Further, it is a game machine capable of playing a game, and a first state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easy to win and a second state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium is difficult to win (for example). For example, a variable winning means (for example, a first special variable winning ball device 907a (first large winning opening), a second special variable winning ball device 907b (second large winning opening)) that can be changed to a closed state). It is possible to change the variable winning means to the first state until a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or at least one of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is established in the game medium. In the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) in which the unit game (for example, a round) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds), and in the advantageous state. A special state control means (for example, a probabilistic state) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a probabilistic state) based on the passage of the game medium through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second large winning opening) provided in the variable winning means. , Game control microcomputer 90100) and a specific number (for example, 11th or 12th) in which the number of game media is larger than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state after the game medium has passed through the specific area in the advantageous state. ) Based on the fact that a prize has been won (for example, an over-winning has occurred), a notification effect by a special mode (for example, a mode in which the first large winning opening LED9020a emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908). It is characterized in that it is provided with a notification effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S903923 and S903924 in the effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing the notification effect). According to such a configuration, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, the notification effect by a special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

(3) In (1), when a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the second advantageous state, the notification effect execution means does not execute the notification effect in a special mode (for example, a probability variation jackpot). In the game machine configured to be controlled to the probabilistic state based on the above, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute steps S903923 and S903924 when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from being lowered by not executing the notification effect by the special mode in the second advantageous state.

(4) In (2), if the game medium wins a specific number of prizes in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game medium passes through the specific area, the notification effect execution means performs the notification effect in a special mode. It may be configured not to execute (for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 is N in steps S903921 and S903922, steps S903923 and S903924 are not executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game by the notification effect from being deteriorated by not executing the notification effect by the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area. it can.

(5) In (1) or (3), the notification effect execution means is based on the fact that the game medium has won less than a specific number in one unit game in the advantageous state, and the notification effect (for example, the first major It is possible to execute (for example, a portion in which step S903925 is executed when step S903920 is N in step S903920), and one unit game in the second advantageous state can be executed (for example, a notification effect in which the winning opening LED9020a and the second large winning opening LED9020b emit white light). When a specific number of winning games are won in the game medium, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode (for example, the notification effect is executed in the game machine configured to be controlled to the probability change state based on the probability change jackpot. In the media, the effect control CPU 90120 may be configured to execute step S903925 when it is determined that it is a normal jackpot. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

(6) In (2) or (4), the notification effect execution means is based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media have won a prize in one unit game in the advantageous state, and the notification effect (for example, the first major It is possible to execute (for example, a portion in which step S903925 is executed when step S903920 is N in step S903920), and before the game medium passes through the specific area, it is possible to execute a notification effect in which the winning opening LED9020a and the second large winning opening LED9020b emit white light. In addition, when a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed (for example, when the effect control CPU 90120 is N in steps S903921 and S903922, step S903925 is performed. It may be configured to do). According to such a configuration, before the game medium passes through the specific area, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

(7) In any one of (1), (3), or (5), when the advantageous state is controlled, a predetermined game value is given (for example, the probabilistic state is controlled). A specific effect executing means (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) that can execute a specific effect (for example, a promotion effect executed in the same manner as or similar to FIGS. 69 (2) to (6)) for notifying the specific effect. In a game machine configured to be controlled to a probabilistic state based on the above, the effect control CPU 90120 is provided with a portion that executes the same processing as S903928), and the notification effect executing means is a specific effect. If a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the first advantageous state before executing, the notification effect by the special mode is not executed (for example, the probability change state is set based on the probability change jackpot. In the game machine configured to be controlled, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute steps S903923 and S903924 if it determines that the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the fifth round. ), When a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the first advantageous state after executing the specific effect, the notification effect in a special mode is executed (for example, the probability change state based on the probability change jackpot). In the game machine configured to be controlled by the above, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that it is the sixth and subsequent rounds after the promotion effect is executed, steps S903923 and S903924 are performed. It may be configured to do). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by executing the notification effect in a special mode after executing the specific effect.

(8) In any of (2), (4), or (6), special based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second prize opening) in an advantageous state. A special effect executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S903908 to S903916 in the effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing an effect (for example, a probability change confirmation notification) is provided, and the notification effect executing means covers a specific area in an advantageous state as a game medium. When a specific number of game media wins in the unit game (for example, the sixth round) passed by, the notification effect by the special mode is not executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is the sixth round). It may be configured so that N is determined in step S903921 and steps S903923 and S903924 are not executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being hindered by the notification effect by the special aspect, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being deteriorated.

(9) In any one of (1) to (8), the notification effect executing means emits light by a light emitter (for example, rainbow light emission of the first grand prize opening LED9020a) and sound output as a notification effect by a special aspect. (For example, the sound output of a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 908) may be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 executes steps S903923 and S903925). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by the effect using the light emission by the light emitting body and the sound output.

(10) In any of (1) to (9), a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, a winning number notification effect, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative number of acquired balls It is equipped with a notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a number of consecutive chans notification, a big hit song name notification, a right-handed notification, an error notification, a production control CPU 90120 that executes a big hit middle promotion effect, etc. As a first predetermined effect that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in a specific period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit game) and in a special period. It is possible to execute a second predetermined effect that notifies the magnitude of the acquired value (for example, a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit game during a continuous chan). , The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect have different priorities (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed, etc.). You may. According to such a configuration, a plurality of predetermined effects can be suitably executed.

(11) In any of (1) to (10), the notification effect executing means is the winning of the first specific number (for example, the eleventh) and the winning of the first specific number, which is larger than the predetermined number. The notification effect is executed using a different sound output channel from the second specific number (for example, the twelfth) of the next prize (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 is the eleventh (first over prize). ), The first notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch0, and the second notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch1 at the twelfth (second over prize).) According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification effect on different channels for the first specific number of prizes, which is larger than the predetermined number, and the second specific number of prizes, which is the next prize after the first specific number of prizes. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, even when more prizes than a predetermined number are generated at short intervals, the notification effect can be executed.

The second modification will be described in more detail. Here, in the second modification, it is assumed that the first special variable winning ball device 907a is provided below the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The first special variable winning ball device 907a is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and a specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display device 904B. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid, so that the first big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the first prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. Further, a first large winning opening LED9020a is provided inside the first special variable winning ball device 907a. In this modification, the first large winning opening LED9020a is realized by a multi-color LED.

Further, it is assumed that the second special variable winning ball device 907b is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 907a. The second special variable winning ball device 907b is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, and a specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display device 904B. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid, so that the second big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the second prize opening is detected by the second count switch 9023b. Further, in this modified example, a specific area is provided on the downstream side of the area in the second special variable winning ball device 907b where the second count switch 9023b is provided, and the game ball winning the specific area is provided. It is detected by the specific detection switch 9024. In this modified example, since the second count switch 9023b is provided on the upstream side and the specific detection switch 9024 is provided on the downstream side thereof, the second major winning opening is won and the second count switch 9023b detects. Almost all of the played game balls win a prize in a specific area and are detected by the specific detection switch 9024. Then, in this modified example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second count switch 9023b, and the probability change state is controlled based on the detection by the specific detection switch 9024. Is confirmed. Further, a second large winning opening LED9020b is provided inside the second special variable winning ball device 907b. In this modification, the second large winning opening LED9020b is realized by a multi-color LED.

Further, in this modification, when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that sometimes occurs, the second big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the sixth round, and the first big winning opening is controlled to the open state in the rounds other than the sixth round. Then, in this modified example, when the game ball wins a prize in the specific area in the second big winning opening in the sixth round during the big hit game, it is determined that the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in this modification, if a prize is generated in the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening as the processing during the round, the effect control CPU 90120 is the first large winning opening LED9020a or the second large winning opening. Control is performed so that the mouth LED 9020b emits white light. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big winning opening is controlled to be in the open state, so the control is performed so that the first big winning opening LED9020a emits white light. Further, in the sixth round, since the second special winning opening is controlled to be in the open state, the control is performed so that the second large winning opening LED9020b emits white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the designated command while the large winning opening is open.

66 to 68 are flowcharts showing round post-processing (S90806) in the effect control process processing of the second modification. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first confirms whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (S903901). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in S903901), whether or not the jackpot opening opening flag indicating that the jackpot opening designation command has been received is set in the effect control CPU 90120. Is confirmed (S903902). When the opening opening flag is not set (N in S903902), the effect control CPU 90120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (S903903), and the effect device (image display device 905) is set according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 908, game effect lamp 909, etc.) (S903904).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (S903905), and if the process timer has timed out (Y in S903905), switches the process data (S903906). That is, it switches to the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer, the process timer is started (S903907), and the process proceeds to the process of S903908. On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (N in S903905), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S903908 without performing the processes of S903906 and S903907.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (S903908). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, the probability change confirmation notification designation command indicating that the control to the probability change state transmitted by passing through the specific area in the second prize opening is confirmed is received. (If so) (Y in S903908), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the probability change confirmation notification flag (S903909). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the probability change confirmation notification in the image display device 905 (S903910). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the probability change confirmation notification executing flag and sets the effect period measurement timer 1 to a value corresponding to the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification (for example, a value corresponding to 1.0 second). (S903911), the process proceeds to S903912. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90120 is not set with the probability change confirmation notification flag (N in S903908), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S903912 without performing the processes of S903909 to S903911.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification executing flag is set (S903912). If the probability change confirmation notification executing flag is set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification is being executed) (Y in S903912), the effect control CPU 90120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 (S903913). ), It is confirmed whether or not the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after the subtraction becomes 0 (S903914). If the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after subtraction is 0 (Y in S903914), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the execution of the probability change confirmation notification in the image display device 905 (S903915). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 resets the probability change confirmation notification executing flag, sets the probability change confirmation notification completed flag indicating that the probability change confirmation notification has been executed (S903916), and proceeds to the process of S903917.

In S903912, if the probabilistic confirmation notification executing flag is not set (N in S903912), the effect control CPU 90120 shifts to the process of S903917 without performing the processes of S903913 to S903916. Further, in S903914, if the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after subtraction is not 0 (N in S903914), the process proceeds to S903917 without performing the processes of S903915 and S903916.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the large winning opening winning flag is set (S903917). If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (N in S903917), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the round post-processing. On the other hand, if the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning is generated in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening and the big winning opening winning designation command is received) (in S903917). Y), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the large winning opening winning flag (S903918). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (S903919), and confirms whether or not the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (S903920).

If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, it means that an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred. "Over winning" means, for example, in this modified example, the upper limit of the number of winning balls of the game ball to the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening for each round during the big hit game (10 in this example). Is stipulated, but the game ball wins in the first prize opening and the second prize opening in excess of the upper limit. For example, in this modified example, even before a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in each round during the jackpot game, the tenth slot to the first winning slot or the second winning slot If a prize is detected, the 1st and 2nd prize openings are controlled to be closed, but it seems that the game ball won a prize just before the 1st and 2nd prize openings were closed. In some cases, the 11th or 12th prize may be won and an over prize may occur.

If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (that is, if over winning has occurred) (Y in S903920), whether or not the effect control CPU 90120 is the 7th round or later. Is confirmed (S903921). It should be noted that whether or not the round is the 7th round or later can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the designated command during the opening of the large winning opening.

If it is the seventh and subsequent rounds (Y in S903921), the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (S903922). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification has already been completed) (Y in S903922), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the first grand prize opening LED 9020a to emit rainbow light (for example,). A plurality of colors such as red, blue, and yellow are emitted in order) (S903923). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 controls to output a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 908 (S903924), and ends the round post-processing.

In this modified example, since the first special winning opening is controlled to be in the open state in the seventh and subsequent rounds, the S903923 has only the case where the first large winning opening LED9020a emits rainbow light. The second prize opening LED9020b may also be controlled to emit rainbow light.

In this modified example, the case where the processes of S903920 to S903924 are executed only in the post-round processing is shown, but the processing mode is not limited to such. For example, the same processing as in S903920 to S903924 may be executed in the processing during the round. With such a configuration, for example, even if the program is configured to perform processing during the round until all the game balls that have won the first prize opening or the second prize opening are detected, the over prize is won. When the above is detected, the first large winning opening LED9020a can be made to emit rainbow light or a predetermined winning sound can be output as a sound.

If the value of the winning counter after addition is not 11 or more (that is, if it is not over winning) (N in S903920), or if it is not the 7th round or later (that is, the 1st to 6th rounds). Case) (N in S903921), if the probability change confirmation notification flag is not set (that is, the probability change confirmation notification has not been completed yet) (N in S903922), the effect control CPU 90120 is the first. Control is performed so that the large winning opening LED9020a or the second winning opening LED9020b emits white light (S903925), and the round post-processing is completed. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big winning opening is controlled to be in the open state, so the control is performed so that the first big winning opening LED9020a emits white light. Further, in the sixth round, since the second special winning opening is controlled to be in the open state, the control is performed so that the second large winning opening LED9020b emits white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the designated command while the large winning opening is open.

In this modified example, when the game ball wins the first prize opening or the second prize opening by executing the processing during the round or the processing of S903917 to S903925 of the round post-processing, at least the first one. A notification effect is executed in which the large winning opening LED9020a and the second winning opening LED9020b are made to emit light. Then, in particular, by executing the processes S903920 to S903924, in this modified example, when an over-winning occurs, the game medium wins a prize in a specific area in the second large winning opening, and the probability change confirmation notification is executed. After that, in the case of the seventh and subsequent rounds of the big hit game, the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first big winning opening LED 9020a emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908. When such an over-winning occurs, the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode (in this example, the first special winning opening LED9020a and the second large winning opening LED9020b are made to emit white light). It is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

However, in this modified example, even if an over-winning occurs due to the execution of the determination processing of S903921 and S903922, the case is before the game ball wins in the specific area in the second large winning opening. Is trying not to execute the notification effect by a special mode. By not executing the notification effect in a special mode before the game ball wins a prize in such a specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from being lowered. Further, in this modification, by shifting to S903925 when N in S903921 and S903922, even if an over-winning occurs, it is before the game ball wins in a specific area in the second major winning opening. Is designed to perform a notification effect in a normal manner. In this way, before the game ball wins a prize in the specific area, the effect of the notification effect is improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

Further, in this modified example, by executing the determination process of S903921, the second large winning opening is controlled to be in the open state, and an over winning occurs in the sixth round in which the game ball may win in a specific area. In this case, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (in this example, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed). With such a configuration, in this modified example, the probability change confirmation notification is performed by the notification effect according to the special mode by not executing the notification effect by the special mode in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification may be executed. It prevents the execution from being hindered, and prevents the effect from being reduced.

In this modified example, after the determination processing of S903921 and S903922 is performed, the game medium wins a prize in a specific area in the second big winning opening and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and then after the seventh round of the big hit game. In the case of a round, the case where the first large winning opening 90LED20a emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908 is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, when an over-winning occurs, it is determined whether the jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot that can be controlled in the probabilistic state or a disadvantageous jackpot that is not substantially controlled in the probabilistic state, and it is determined that the jackpot is an advantageous jackpot. When the determination is made, the first large winning opening LED 9020a may be configured to emit rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound may be output from the speaker 908. Further, it is determined whether or not the game medium has won a prize in the specific area in the second big winning opening shown in this modified example and the probability change confirmation notification has been executed, and whether or not it is the above-mentioned advantageous big hit. The rainbow emission of the first prize opening LED9020a and the sound output of the predetermined winning sound may be executed by executing only one of the determinations of the above, or the game medium may be generated in a specific area in the second prize opening. By executing both the determination of whether or not it is after the winning and the probability change confirmation notification is executed and the determination of whether or not it is an advantageous jackpot, the rainbow light emission of the first winning opening LED9020a and the predetermined The sound output of the winning sound may be executed.

Further, in this modification, the number of large prize opening prize designation commands received by the effect control CPU 90120 side using the prize counter is counted, and it is determined that the prize is over prize based on the value of the prize counter being 11 or more. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the game control microcomputer 90100 may determine whether or not the number of winnings in the large winning opening is 11 or more, and determine whether or not an over-winning has occurred. Then, different large prize opening winning designation commands are transmitted depending on whether or not the over winning is performed, and the production control CPU 90120 side receives the over winning opening winning designation command based on which large winning opening winning designation command is received. It may be configured to recognize whether or not it is.

In S903902 of FIG. 66, when the large winning opening opening flag is set (Y in S903902), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the large winning opening opening flag (S903926).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the next round to be started is the second round to the fifth round (S903927). Whether or not it is the second round to the fifth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the designated command while the large winning opening is open. If the next round to be started is the second round to the fifth round (Y in S903927), the effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table according to the effect during the round including the promotion effect (S903928), and processes S903930. Move to. On the other hand, if it is not the second to fifth rounds (that is, if the next round to be started is the sixth and subsequent rounds) (N in S903927), the effect control CPU 90120 is produced (promoted) during the normal round. The process table corresponding to the effect during the round that does not include the effect) is selected (S903929), and the process proceeds to the process of S903930.

In this modification, for example, the image display device 905 executes a roulette effect as a promotion effect. In this case, when starting the first round to the fourth round, in S903928, a process table including an effect in which a roulette ball rotates as a promotion effect is selected. In addition, when the fifth round is started, in S903928, it is unlikely that a specific area in the second big winning opening will be won by specifying which type of jackpot is (it is expected that it will be determined to be controlled to a probability change state). In the case of a big hit (without), a process table including an effect in which the result of the roulette is out of order is selected as the promotion effect. On the other hand, if it is a big hit that is likely to win a prize in a specific area in the second big winning opening (it is highly likely that it will be controlled to a probabilistic state), a roulette result will be a hit as a promotion effect. Select the process table to include. It should be noted that which of the jackpot types is used can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer (S903930), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image as an effect component). Control of the display device 905, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 908) as the effect component is executed (S903931). Further, if the effect control CPU 90120 is set, the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 is subtracted by 1 (S903932).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 initializes the winning counter (S903933). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to 0.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the process during the round (S903934), and ends the post-round process.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set in S903901 of FIG. 66 (Y in S903901), the effect control CPU 90120 resets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (S903935).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 selects a process table according to the ending effect (S903936). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 measures a value corresponding to the ending period at the end of the jackpot game (for example, a value corresponding to 3.0 seconds) to measure the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game. It is set in the production period measurement timer (S903937).

Next, the effect control CPU 90120 starts the process timer (S903938), and according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (image as an effect component). Control of the display device 905, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 908) as the effect component is executed (S903939).

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (S90177) (S903940), and ends the round post-processing.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the notification effect will be described. 69 and 70 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect mode of the notification effect of the second modification. In addition, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the production modes change in the order of (1), (2), (3), and so on.

As shown in FIG. 69 (1), the decorative symbol (directed symbol) on the left, middle, and right is stopped and displayed with the same symbol, a big hit occurs, and as shown in FIG. 69 (2), the first round is started. It is assumed that the jackpot game has started. Further, as shown in FIGS. 69 (2) to 69 (6), promotion effects are also executed in the first round to the fifth round (see S903928). In the example shown in FIG. 69 (2), the case where the promotion effect is started by displaying the image 90200 in such a manner that the roulette is rotated on the image display device 905 is shown.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (3), when a prize is generated in the big prize opening during the round of the big hit game, the notification effect is executed in the normal manner. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (3), a case is shown in which a game ball wins a prize in the first prize opening and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first prize opening LED9020a emits white light.

In addition, even if the number of winnings to the large winning opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) and the round is completed, over-winning may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 69 (4), even if an over-winning occurs, the game ball wins a prize in a specific area in the second major winning opening, which is a round before the sixth round, and the probability changes. If it is before the definite notification is executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal manner. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (4), there is a case where an over-winning to the first special winning opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first large winning opening LED9020a emits white light (see S903925). ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (5), the second and subsequent rounds are executed in the same manner, and as shown in FIG. 69 (6), when the fifth round is reached, the result of winning or failing the roulette is notified. The promotion effect of various aspects is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (6), the ball enters the area displayed as "probability" in the roulette wheel based on the jackpot type being the jackpot, and the result of the roulette hits (probability variation). It is shown that the promotion effect is executed by displaying an image in a mode such that (a result suggesting that the state is reached) and displaying a character string 90201 such as "probability change promotion!". If the jackpot type is a jackpot that does not become a probability variation jackpot (normal jackpot), for example, the ball enters an area other than the area indicated as "probability" in the roulette wheel, and the result of the roulette is missed (probability variation). The promotion effect is executed by displaying an image in a mode such that (a result suggesting that the state is not reached) and displaying a character string such as "No probabilistic promotion!".

In this modified example, a case where a roulette effect is executed as a promotion effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a promotion effect, it is suggested that the enemy and the ally character battle and the ally character wins to enter the probabilistic state, or that the ally character loses to the probabilistic state. You may perform an effect such as. In addition, for example, as a promotion effect, an effect such as displaying an Omikuji is performed, suggesting that if the result of the Omikuji is "good", it will be in a probable state, or if the result of the Omikuji is "bad", it will be in a probable state. You may perform an effect that suggests that this is not the case. As such, as the promotion effect, it suffices to execute an effect that can incite whether or not the probabilistic state is controlled in some way.

Further, in this modified example, the promotion effect is executed from the first round to the fifth round, and the result of the promotion effect is notified (in this example, the result of the roulette is notified) in the final fifth round. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the result notification of the promotion effect may be enabled in the first round to the fourth round without waiting for the fifth round. In this case, after notifying the result of the promotion effect, the notification effect in a special mode may be executed when an over-winning occurs without waiting for the fifth round or the sixth round.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (7), the process proceeds to the sixth round and the second big winning opening is controlled to be in the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (7), in the sixth round, the game ball wins in the second big winning opening and the game ball wins in a specific area in the second big winning opening, and the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state. Is confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (7), since the game ball won the second prize opening during the sixth round, it is also shown that the notification effect is executed in a manner in which the second prize opening LED9020b emits white light. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (8), the image display device 905 starts executing the probability change confirmation notification based on the fact that the control to the probability change state is confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (8), a character string 90202 such as "probability change confirmation!" Is displayed on the image display device 905 as the probability change confirmation notification.

In addition, in FIG. 69 (7), when a game ball wins a prize in a specific area in the second big prize opening (particularly, when the first game ball wins in a specific area), the second big winning opening LED9020b (The first large winning opening LED9020a may be used) is made to emit light with a special emission color (for example, a red color different from the notification effect of the special mode), or a special winning sound (for example, different from the notification effect of the special mode). A dedicated winning sound) may be output.

Further, even if the number of winnings to the second major winning opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) in the sixth round and the round is completed, over-winning may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70 (9), even if an over-winning occurs, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification may be executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal manner. Will be done. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (9), there is a case where an over-winning to the second special winning opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the second large winning opening LED 20b emits white light (see S903925). ).

Then, the process shifts to the seventh and subsequent rounds. Even in the seventh and subsequent rounds, as shown in FIG. 70 (10), when a prize is generated in the big prize opening during the round of the big hit game, the notification effect is executed in the normal manner. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (10), a case is shown in which a game ball wins a prize in the first prize opening and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first prize opening LED9020a emits white light.

On the other hand, when an over-winning occurs in the seventh and subsequent rounds, as shown in FIG. 70 (11), the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (11), an over prize is generated in the first prize opening, the first prize opening LED9020a is made to emit rainbow light, and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908. Is shown (see S903923, S903924).

In this modified example, the case where a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908 only in the case of the notification effect by the special mode is shown, but the notification effect by the normal mode is executed not limited to such a mode. In some cases, some winning sound (the same sound as in the case of the special mode or a different sound) may be output.

Further, in this modified example, as a notification effect by a special mode, a case is shown in which the first large winning opening LED9020a is made to emit rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the first grand prize opening LED9020a may only emit rainbow light and may not be accompanied by sound output of the winning sound. Further, for example, if the light emitting color is different from the notification effect according to the normal mode, the first grand prize opening LED9020a or the like is emitted by a light emitting color other than the rainbow light emission (for example, red or yellow). May be good. Further, for example, instead of causing the first special winning opening LED9020a to emit rainbow light, an effect of outputting a sound imitating the voice of a predetermined character may be executed as a notification effect by a special aspect. As such, as the notification effect by the special aspect, various aspects of the effect can be considered.

In this modified example, the case where the unit game (round) is executed 15 times (15 rounds) in the big hit game is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and it is another number of times. You may. Further, the predetermined number of times may be once or twice. For example, when a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit that opens the big winning opening only once or twice is provided, the sudden probability change big hit or Over-winning in small hits may also be detectable.

In this modified example, if an over-winning occurs before the game ball wins a specific area in the second large winning opening, a notification effect in the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect in the special mode. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if an over-winning occurs before the game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening, the notification effect may not be executed at all.

In this modified example, in the sixth round in which the probability variation confirmation notification is executed, only the notification effect in the special mode is not executed, and the notification effect in the normal mode (in this example, the first grand prize opening LED9020a or the second). The notification effect of the mode in which the large winning opening LED9020b emits white light) is shown in the case of being configured to be executed, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, both the notification effect in the special mode and the notification effect in the normal mode may not be executed.

In this modified example, a case is shown in which the game ball is controlled to be in a probabilistic state based on the winning of a game ball in a specific area provided in the second large winning opening. Not limited. For example, the types of jackpots are normal jackpot (a jackpot that is not controlled to a probable change state after a jackpot game. It may be controlled to a time saving state or a high base state after a jackpot game) and probabilistic jackpot (probability change after a jackpot game). A jackpot controlled by the state. In addition to the probability variation state, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a high base state), so that the probability variation state is controlled based on the probability variation jackpot. The configuration for executing the notification effect shown in this modification may be applied to the gaming machine configured in. Hereinafter, a modified example of executing the notification effect in the gaming machine configured to be controlled to the probabilistic state based on the probability change jackpot will be described.

In this modified example, it is not necessary to provide a specific area in the large winning opening, and it may be configured to include only one special variable winning ball device (large winning opening).

When the notification effect is executed in the game machine configured to be controlled to the probability change state based on the probability change big hit, at least the first advantageous state (this example) is set as the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state). Then, it is possible to control between a jackpot gaming state based on a probabilistic jackpot) and a second advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot gaming state based on a normal jackpot (non-probability jackpot)), which has a lower advantage than the first advantageous state. .. Then, based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number (for example, the 11th or 12th) more than a predetermined number (10 in this example) in one unit game in the first advantageous state among them. It suffices to enable the notification effect in a special mode (in this example, the notification effect in which the first large winning opening LED 9020a emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 908). With such a configuration, the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the first advantageous state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by directing.

Further, when the notification effect is executed in the gaming machine configured to be controlled to the probabilistic state based on the probable change big hit, the big hit based on the second advantageous state (in this example, the normal big hit (non-probable change big hit)). When a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the game state), the notification effect by the special mode may not be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination processing of S903921 and S903922 in the round post-processing, it is determined whether or not it is a normal big hit, and if it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the processing of S903923 and S903924 may not be executed. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the game by the notification effect from being lowered by not executing the notification effect by the special mode in the second advantageous state.

In addition, when the notification effect is executed in the game machine configured to be controlled to the probability change state based on the probability change jackpot, it is based on the fact that the game medium has won less than a specific number in one unit game in the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to execute the notification effect in the normal mode (in this example, the notification effect in which the first special winning opening LED9020a and the second large winning opening LED9020b emit white light). Then, when a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the second advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state based on the normal big hit), the notification effect in the normal mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination processing of S903921 and S903922 in the round post-processing, it may be determined whether or not it is a normal big hit, and if it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the processing of S903925 may be executed. With such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

In addition, when the notification effect is executed in a game machine configured to be controlled to the probability change state based on the probability change jackpot, a predetermined game value is given when the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a promotion effect executed in the same manner as or similar to FIGS. 69 (2) to (6)) for notifying (in this example, being controlled to a probabilistic state). .. Then, if a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the first advantageous state before executing the specific effect (in this example, before the result notification in the promotion effect), the notification effect in a special mode is executed. No (in this example, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect in the special mode), and after executing the specific effect (in this example, after the result notification in the promotion effect), the first advantageous state When a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in 1 above, the notification effect by a special mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process of S903921 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the fifth round, and the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the first round. If it is determined that the number of rounds is 5, S903923 and S903924 may not be executed (S903925 may be executed). Further, if it is determined that the rounds are the sixth and subsequent rounds, S903923 and S903924 may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by executing the notification effect in a special mode after executing the specific effect.

In the above modified example, since it is determined that the game ball is actually controlled to the probabilistic state based on the winning of the game ball in the specific area in the second big winning opening, in the first round to the fifth round. It is suggested that even if the promotion effect is executed and the hit result is notified, there is a high possibility that the hit result will be controlled to the probabilistic state. However, in this modification, whether or not the hit result is controlled by the jackpot type Since it has been decided, it can be recognized that if the hit result is notified in the promotion effect, it is controlled to the probabilistic state as it is.

In the above modified example, the first advantageous state with high advantage is the big hit gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot, and the second advantageous state with low advantage is the jackpot gaming state based on the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot). Cases have been shown, but not limited to such aspects.

For example, when a time-saving jackpot controlled only in a time-saving state after a jackpot game and a normal jackpot controlled only in a normal state are provided, the first advantageous state is set to the jackpot gaming state based on the time-saving jackpot, and the second advantage The state may be a big hit game state based on a normal big hit. Further, for example, when the so-called look-ahead determination is performed during the jackpot game, the case where there is a jackpot in the hold storage (that is, the case where the jackpot is continuous) is set as the first advantageous state, and the jackpot is defined as the jackpot. The second advantageous state may be the case where there is no such thing.

Further, for example, the first advantageous state may be a jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, a 15-round jackpot), and the second advantageous state may be a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, a 5-round jackpot). Further, for example, the first advantageous state is a big hit in which the probability change continuation number and the time reduction continuation number after the big hit game are not determined (a big hit in which the probability change state and the time reduction state continue until the next big hit), and the second advantageous state is the big hit game. It may be a big hit in which the number of probable change continuations and the number of time reduction continuations are set. Further, for example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit having a large number of probable change continuations and a short time reduction continuation number after the big hit game, and the second advantageous state may be a big hit having a small number of probable change continuation times and a small time reduction continuation number after the big hit game.

As described above, it is sufficient that the first advantageous state having a high advantage and the second advantageous state having a low advantage are provided in some form.

Moreover, even in one case, advantages or disadvantages may be distinguished from a plurality of viewpoints. For example, when there are 5R probability variation big hit and 10R normal big hit as big hit types, 10R normal big hit with many rounds is more advantageous from the viewpoint of the number of rounds, and it can be considered from the viewpoint of the game state after the big hit game. For example, the 5R probability variation jackpot, which is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot game, is more advantageous. In this case, the viewpoint of the number of rounds may be prioritized and the 10R normal jackpot may be set as the first advantageous state, and the 5R probability variation jackpot may be set as the second advantageous state, or the viewpoint of the gaming state after the jackpot game may be prioritized and 5R. The probabilistic jackpot may be the first advantageous state, and the 10R normal jackpot may be the second advantageous state.

In the above modified example, as a notification effect, a first notification (a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during a big hit game) that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in a specific period. ) And the second notification (a prize ball number notification effect that notifies the number of prize balls paid out as prize balls during the big hit game during the consecutive chan) that notifies the magnitude of the value acquired in the special period can be executed. May be. Then, the priority of the first notification may be higher than that of the second notification (when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed). In this way, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed. That is, it is possible to execute a plurality of notification effects so as not to overlap in order of priority, and it is possible to preferably execute a plurality of notification effects.

Further, in the above modified example, in one open game (big hit game in this example), the game medium (game ball in this example) is variable more than the upper limit winning number (10 in this example). Based on winning a prize in the winning means (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning opening)), the notification effect (notification effect for over-winning) can be executed. In addition, different sound output channels are used for the first winning number (11th), which is larger than the maximum number of winnings, and the second winning number (12th), which is the next winning after the first winning number. The first notification effect is executed on the playback channel Ch0 for the eleventh (first over prize), and the second notification effect is executed on the playback channel Ch1 for the twelfth (second over prize). (The notification effect is executed). In this way, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first prize, which is larger than the maximum number of prizes, and the second prize, which is the next prize after the first prize, and the game. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the person. In addition, even when more prizes than the maximum number of prizes are generated at short intervals, the notification effect can be executed.

Next, the modified examples and feature points described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described modification, the notification mode of the notification effect may be different depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the mode of the notification effect is set to a plurality of types of notification modes, and the notification effect in white characters and the notification effect in rainbow-colored characters are executed. Then, during the jackpot game, the notification effect that is normally executed in white characters may be executed in rainbow-colored characters based on the hold storage that is the jackpot display result in the hold storage buffer. In this way, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the variable display that is the jackpot display result is stored in the hold storage buffer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot game. it can. When the variable display that is the jackpot display result is stored in the hold storage buffer, the notification effect may be executed in rainbow-colored characters at a rate of 100%, or a predetermined lottery rate (for example, The notification effect may be executed in rainbow-colored characters at a rate of 50%). Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the notification effect is executed a plurality of times in one big hit, but the lottery for whether or not to make the rainbow-colored characters may be executed each time. .. Further, once the notification effect using the rainbow-colored characters is executed at one time, the subsequent notification effects may be executed by the rainbow-colored characters.

(2) In the above-described modified example, the promotion effect from the normal jackpot to the probabilistic jackpot may be executed during the jackpot game. In such a case, when the notification effect is executed in the round in which the promotion effect is executed, the mode of the notification effect may be different from the normal mode.

(3) In the above-described modified example, a plurality of types of jackpots may be provided. Then, the mode of the notification effect may be different depending on the type of jackpot. For example, 4R jackpot, 8R jackpot, and 15 round jackpot may be provided as the types of jackpots, and the notification mode of the notification effect may be different depending on the type of each jackpot.

(4) In the modification described above, an upper limit value may be set for the display of the total number of acquisitions. Then, when the game ball is acquired up to the upper limit value, the update of the total acquisition number display may be stopped. For example, when 100,000 is set as the upper limit and the total number of game balls acquired exceeds 100,000, the total number of acquired images 90205 in the A mode and the total number of acquired images 90215 in the B mode are displayed. The update of the display image may be stopped. In this way, it is possible to notify that the player has acquired a large number of game balls by stopping the update, and it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority. When the upper limit is reached, the display of the total number of acquisitions may be changed to a mode different from the normal display mode.

(5) In the modified example described above, it may be changed depending on the total number of game balls that have acquired the mode of notification effect. For example, when the B mode is selected and the total number of acquired game balls is 2500, the second notification image 90214 is displayed as an image of white characters, and the total number of acquired game balls is 5000. At that time, the second broadcast image 90214 may be displayed as an image of red characters, and when the total number of acquired game balls reaches 10,000, the second broadcast image 90214 may be displayed as an image of rainbow characters. In this way, the notification mode changes according to the total number of acquisitions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game. Even in the A mode, the notification mode may be different depending on the total number of game balls acquired. In such a case, the notification mode may be different only when the numbers are well separated, such as 2500, 5000, and 10000, or the notification mode may be different for each 500. ..

(6) In the above-described modified example, the mode of the notification effect may be changed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. For example, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, the notification effect may not be executed, or a different concept may be displayed. More specifically, after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, the broadcast image may not be displayed. In addition, after the total number of game balls acquired exceeds the predetermined value, a concept display different from the display of the total number of acquisitions, such as "Congratulations!" (Display to celebrate the achievement of the predetermined value, etc.) is displayed from the numbers. The notification effect by the display that changes to characters may be executed.

(7) In the above-described modified example, a case where the displayed image differs depending on the effect state (depending on the A mode or B mode) as the mode of the notification effect is shown. As such a display image, the color of the characters may be different, the font of the characters may be different, or the appearance of the characters may be different. The appearance of the characters may be different, for example, the appearance direction of the characters (numbers) may be different between those appearing from the left side and those appearing from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 905.

(8) In the above-described modification, the image when the notification effect is executed may be composed of different materials. For example, when the A mode is selected, the first broadcast image 90204 and the girl image 90203 may be made of different materials. In this way, the images to be displayed can be set separately. Then, as a method of displaying, for example, a lottery may be used to determine which combination of images is to be displayed. In such a case, a restriction may be applied so that the same predetermined image is not displayed continuously.

(9) In the above-described modified example, during the mode selection as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the notification effect may not be executed even if the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. Further, in such a case, it is stored in the storage area of the RAM 90122 that the notification effect is executed, and it is notified that the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value after the mode selection is completed. May be good. Further, if the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value during the mode selection, the notification effect may not be executed.

(10) In the modification described above, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, during the jackpot game, the A mode and the B mode may always be selectable. In that case, in the second and subsequent rounds, the selection display can be selected as the edge area of the display screen so as not to interfere with the production during the round by occupying a large area of the display screen of the image display device 905. Something may be displayed small.

(11) In the modified example described above, a case where A mode and B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, the establishment of the special condition may prevent the player from selecting the mode. For example, in a case where some story is continuously displayed during each round of big hits, it is a special condition that the ending of the story is displayed based on the fact that the big hits are displayed 20 times in a row. In this case, the mode may not be selectable during the 20th jackpot where the ending is displayed. Further, during the 20th big hit where the ending is displayed, the notification effect may not be executed, or the small window image for the notification effect is displayed in an area different from the area where the ending is displayed and the area concerned. The notification effect may be executed by. Further, the mode of the notification effect may be different between a jackpot that the player can select and a jackpot that the player cannot select (big hit under special conditions).

(12) In the above-described modified example, whether or not the notification effect is executed may be determined depending on whether the jackpot is advantageous or unfavorable to the player. For example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, which is a jackpot advantageous to the player, the notification effect may be executed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, which is a jackpot disadvantageous to the player, the notification effect may not be executed.

(13) In the above-described modified example, the game balls counted for the notification effect are paid out for the winning of the game balls. However, the game ball may be a game ball in which the number of difference balls obtained by deducting the game ball that is driven into the game area and taken into the out port from the game ball that is paid out is counted for the notification effect. In order to do so, for example, a launch sensor may be provided at the launch position of the hit ball, and an out port sensor capable of counting the game ball captured in the out port may be provided. Then, by monitoring each winning sensor including the large winning opening, the firing sensor, and the out opening sensor, the number of different balls may be counted.

(14) In the above-described modification, in the gaming system having the configuration including the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the management server connected to the Internet network, the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the management server have a two-dimensional code reading function and the Internet network. Data is exchanged via a mobile terminal equipped with the connection function of, and in the pachinko game machine 901, the player's past game history and the effect selected by the player are selected by the player who owns the mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone). It may be possible to execute a game mode (mobile interlocking mode) that enables the game to be played in a game mode that reflects a mode (a mode in which characters appearing are different) and the like. In such a case, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on whether or not the mobile interlocking mode is executed. Further, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on the type of mode selected by the player.

(15) In the above-described modified example, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different due to the notification of different lottery. The different lottery notifications are, for example, in a promotion production that notifies that a normal jackpot will be changed to a probability variation jackpot during a jackpot, a complete notification mode that announces the presence or absence of probability variation promotion by one notification and a probability variation promotion by multiple notifications. It is like notification by the chance notification mode to notify the presence or absence of. Such a difference in notification may be regarded as a difference in the effect state, and the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on the complete notification mode and the chance notification mode.

(16) In the above-described modified example, the effect state (effect mode) may be changed in a game state other than during the jackpot game. For example, the mode of the notification effect during the next big hit game may be changed by changing the effect state during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it will not be (determined), or at least the probability of one of the determination results will be 0% (never determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of other determination results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc., one variation is made when the variation is started. Although an example of transmitting a pattern command is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) has the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of sliding effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command (for example, a pre-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, a pre-variation pattern) of the second stop is transmitted, and the second command determines the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (for example, the post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has passed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

In addition, it is generated based on the start prize when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening, or is based on the start prize when the game ball passes (enters) through the second start prize opening. The display mode (color, shape, etc.) of the look-ahead notice effect and the hold memory display may be different depending on whether or not it has occurred.

Further, in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 46, a determination is performed using the table data for determining the special figure display result selected in the process of step S90402. In this way, as the jackpot determination data indicating the jackpot determination range used for determining whether or not the variable display result is determined as "big hit", a predetermined number when the game state is not the probability variation state (high probability state). When the start winning is generated by providing the normal judgment data including the big hit judgment value of the above and the special judgment data including a larger number of big hit judgment values than a predetermined number when the game state is in the probability change state. When the game state is not in the probabilistic state, the variable display result is judged using the normal judgment data, while when the game state when the start winning is generated is in the probabilistic state, the variable display result is determined using the special judgment data. judge. Here, when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1'for determining the special figure display result extracted based on the occurrence of the starting prize. In addition to determining that the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probable" using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2'for determining the jackpot type, it is determined that the probability variation control is not performed after the jackpot game state ends. Occasionally, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect based on the start winning prize generated within the period until the probability variation control is completed based on the display result in the variable display that is the target of the determination may be restricted. As a result, even though the probability change control is completed, the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the judgment result that the variable display result is determined as "big hit" is executed using the special judgment data corresponding to the probability change state. This can be prevented and the consistency of the production content can be maintained.

In the above embodiment, a special figure game using the first special figure is executed based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the game that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. It has been described that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the detection of the sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special figure game using a common special symbol is executed regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It may be one.

In addition, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart, various production operations including the display operation of the production image in the display area of the image display device 905, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine 901 deviate from the gist of the present invention. It is possible to change and modify it arbitrarily as long as it does not.

In addition, in the game machine of the present invention, a game ball is paid out to the player as a prize, and the player fires the paid out game ball (which may be a rental ball) into the game area to play the game. Although it was a game machine, a game score for use in a game is given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applied to a game machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area using the given game score or the game score given by winning a game. Can be done.

That is, it is provided with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each of the game media based on the passage of the starting area provided in the game area and deriving and displaying the display result. It is a game machine that controls a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the game score is not 0, the game score is used in the game machine. The game is played by driving the game ball enclosed in the game into the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hit of the game ball, and the game score is obtained according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that adds. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game points is recorded, and a game record. A game recording medium processing means for reading out the recording information recorded on the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot may be provided.

Only one type of off-design (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. .. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above embodiment, the main side makes a look-ahead judgment and sends a command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends a command indicating a random value and makes a look-ahead judgment on the sub side. You may do so.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot type is determined at the start of the fluctuation to determine whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is set to the "probability change state", but at the start of the fluctuation, the opening pattern of the big winning opening ( Only the mode of the round game) is determined (it may be specified by the big hit type, etc.), and the big hit game is based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. The gaming state after the state may be set to the "probability change state".

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32A, 32B ... Movable member for production 33A, 33B ... Movable member drive motor 35A ... Controller sensor unit 35B ... Push sensor 90 ... Lighting accessory for production 122 ... Memory controller 123 ... Production data memory 131 ... CPU
132 ... ROM
133 ... RAM
134… Watchdog timer 135… VDP
136 ... Audio processing circuit 137 ... Lamp control circuit 138 ... Motor control circuit 141 ... Instruction decoder 142 ... Demultiplexer 143 ... Video decoder 144 ... VRAM
145 ... Display drive circuit 151 ... Voice decoder 901 ... Pachinko game machine 902 ... Game board 903 ... Game machine frame 904A, 904B ... Special symbol display device 905 ... Image display device 906A ... Ordinary winning ball device 906B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 907 ... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R ... Speaker 909 ... Game effect lamp 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 ... Normal symbol display 9021 ... Gate switch 9022A, 9022B ... Start port switch 9023 ... Count switch 9031A ... Stick controller 9031B ... Push button 90100 ... Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121 ... ROM
90102, 90122 ... RAM
90103 ... CPU
90104, 90124 ... Random number circuit 90105, 90125 ... I / O
90120 ... CPU for production control
90123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A storage means that can store data related to display control,
A display control means capable of reading the stored data of the storage means and controlling the display means,
It is equipped with a signal generation means that generates a time lapse signal when the measurement time elapses.
The display control means
The first control that initializes the measurement time by the signal generating means before the monitoring time elapses, and the predetermined event that the first control is not executed during the reading period in which the stored data of the storage means is read. When it occurs, it is possible to execute a second control that initializes the measurement time by the signal generating means before the monitoring time elapses.
further,
The background when the variable display is executed includes at least the first background and the second background.
In the first background, the first background music is output from the beginning each time the variable display is executed once.
In the second background, the second background music is output over a plurality of variable displays.
In the second background, Ri can be output der a predetermined sound when starting variable display,
When the first variable display is started after the second background is set, the predetermined sound is not output.
A game machine characterized by that.